2017 Skoda Rapid 102433 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 184

SIMPLY CLEVER

OWNER´S MANUAL

ŠKODA Rapid

5JA012720AK
Preface

You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety,
vehicle care, maintenance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data,
are given in this Owner's Manual.
For vehicles with Infotainment, some functions and vehicle systems are op-
erated via Infotainment.
Please do not read just this Owner's Manual, but also read the Infotainment
Owner's Manual carefully. The procedure in accordance with the two instruc-
tions is a prerequisite for the correct use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the general binding country-specific legal require-
ments (e.g. transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, road traf-
fic, etc.) must always be observed.
Please always pay attention when driving! As the driver you are fully respon-
sible for road safety.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at
all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO


5JA012720AK
Driving data (Multifunction display) 39 Brakes and parking 86
Table of Contents MAXI DOT display 41 Manual gear changing and pedals 88
materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty Service interval display 42 Automatic gearbox 89
for new cars 4 SmartGate 43 Running in and economical driving 91
On-board literature 6 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 92
Unlocking and opening 45
Notes 7 Unlocking and locking 45 Assist systems 93
Anti-theft alarm system 49 General information 93
Structure of the Owner's Manual and further Luggage compartment lid 50 Braking and stabilisation systems 93
information 8 Window operation 51 Parking aid (ParkPilot) 96
Reversing camera 98
Abbreviations Lights and visibility 53
Cruise Control System 100
Lights 53
Safety Speed limiter 101
Interior lighting 57
Front Assist 102
Passive Safety 10 Visibility 58
Fatigue detection 105
General information 10 Windscreen wipers and washers 59
Tyre pressure monitoring 106
Correct and safe seated position 10 Rear view mirror 61
Towing device and trailer 108
Seat belts 12 Seats and head restraints 62
Hitch 108
Using seat belts 12 Front seats 62
Use the towing device 112
Inertia reels and belt tensioners 14 Rear seats 63
Headrests 64 General Maintenance
Airbag system 15 Seat heaters 65
Description of the airbag system 15 Care and maintenance 115
Airbag deactivation 18 Useful features 66
Service work, adjustments and technical
Interior fittings 66 alterations 115
Transporting children safely 19 Tablet holder 73 Service intervals 117
Child seat 19
Transport of cargo 74 Cleaning and care 119
Fastening systems 22
Luggage compartment and transporting Inspecting and replenishing 123
Using the system objects 74
Fuel 123
Transportation on the roof rack 78
Cockpit 27 Engine compartment 125
Overview 26 Heating and ventilation 79 Engine oil 128
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Coolant 129
Instruments and warning lights 28 Climatronic 79 Brake fluid 130
Instrument cluster 28
Vehicle battery 131
Warning lights 29 Driving
Wheels 133
Information system 37 Starting-off and Driving 83 Wheels and tyres 133
Driver information system 37 Starting and stopping the engine 83 Operating in winter conditions 136
Operation of the information system 39 START-STOPsystem 85

2 Table of Contents
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help 138
Emergency equipment 138
Changing a wheel 139
Breakdown kit 143
Jump-starting 145
Towing the vehicle 146
Remote - change battery 148
Emergency unlocking / unlocking of doors 148
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 149
Fuses and light bulbs 151
Fuses 151
Bulbs 154

Technical data
Technical data 160
Basic vehicle data 160
Vehicle-specific details per engine type 165

Index

Table of Contents 3
If your ŠKODA vehicle was purchased from a ŠKODA Partner in a country of the
materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new European Economic Area (i.e. the countries of the European Union, Norway,
cars Iceland and Liechtenstein) or in Switzerland, claims arising from the ŠKODA
warranty must also be made through a ŠKODA Service Partner in one of these
Materials defect liability countries.
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your If your ŠKODA vehicle was purchased from a ŠKODA Partner outside the Euro-
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac- pean Economic Area and Switzerland, claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement. must also be made through a ŠKODA Service Partner outside the European
ŠKODA warranty for new cars Economic Area and Switzerland.
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO grants you the ŠKODA A prerequisite for carrying out work under the ŠKODA warranty is that all serv-
warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” according ice work has been carried out in a timely and technically correct manner and in
to the conditions described below. accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO provisions. It must be proven that service
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will provide the following serv- work has been carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO
ices. provisions when making a claim on the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of a
▶ Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two missed service or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. provisions, you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can
▶ Free repair of paint work defects on your vehicle that occur within three prove that the missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. the ŠKODA AUTO provisions was not the cause of the defect.
▶ Free repair of corrosion caused by rust on the bodywork of your vehicle that
Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
occurs within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only corrosion of The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork, installations or
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of cor- conversions provided by third parties, or vehicle faults caused as a result. The
rosion caused by rust on the bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty. same applies to accessories that were not installed and/or delivered ex-facto-
The start of warranty is the date on which the new car is handed over to the ry.
initial purchaser by the ŠKODA Partner1). This date must be noted down by the In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of
ŠKODA Partner in the Owner's Manual for your vehicle » in the section on the the following:
documentation of the vehicle handover. ▶ Unauthorised use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-

Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re- loading), improper care and maintenance or unauthorised modifications to
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner. your vehicle.
▶ Non-compliance with instructions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particular, supplied instructions.
there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a courtesy ▶ External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.). 
vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages.

1)
Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific regula-
tions, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the
vehicle handover.

4 materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars


▶ Parts fitted on or in the vehicle, whose use has not been approved by ŠKODA Note
AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not approved by ŠKODA The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
AUTO (e.g. tuning).
▶ Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
rage or was not rectified properly.
It is the customer's responsibility to prove that s/he is not the cause of the
damage.
This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from ma-
terials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims from
product liability laws.
Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
If your vehicle breaks down on the road due to an unexpected failure, services
are provided under the mobility guarantee to keep you moving, which include
the following: Breakdown assistance at the roadside and towing to ŠKODA
Service partners, technical assistance on the phone or on-site commissioning.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner may
provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation (bus,
train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc.
More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobility
warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They will
also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility warranty
with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility warranty
coverage in place for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA Service
Partner about the possibility of a supplementary agreement.
Optional ŠKODA extended warranty
If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car,
the two-year ŠKODA warranty with regards to carrying out all warranty repairs
is extended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has been
reached, whichever occurs first.
The paint warranty and the warranty against corrosion described above are
unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty.
The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils.
The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is
provided by your ŠKODA partner.

materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars 5


Online user manuals
On-board literature
You will always find this Owner's Manual in the on-board literature. Depending Fig. 1
on the equipment installed, the on-board literature may also contain the Own- On-board literature online at the
er's Manual - Infotainment. ŠKODA websites
Owner´s Manual
These Owner´s Manual apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
This Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in this Owner's Manual. Todisplay on-board literature online proceed as follows.
The range of equipment installed in your vehicle depends on the purchase 1. Read the QR-Code » Fig. 1 using the corresponding application in your ex-
contract for the vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, ternal device (e.g. telephone, tablet) or Enter the following address into
please contact a ŠKODA Partner, if required. your web browser.
The Pictures in this Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The il- http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
lustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended The website is opened with a model overview for the ŠKODA brand.
to provide general information. 2. Select the desired model - a menu for the user manuals is displayed.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development 3. Select the construction period as well as the language.
with all vehicles. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time 4. Select one of the following manual types.
with regard to design, equipment and technology. The information listed in
this Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of  File in pdfformat
going to press.  On-line-Version of the instructions
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-  Variant for the mobile device - Application My ŠKODA App
tions and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
We recommend that web pages that are referred to in this Owner's Manual are
displayed using the classic view. Not all necessary information may be dis-
played correctly if the mobile view is chosen.
Infotainment Owner´s Manual
The Infotainment Owner's Manual contains a description of the Infotainment
service and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.

6 On-board literature
Notes

Terms used
“Specialist garage” - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist garage can be a ŠKODA partner, a ŠKODA
service partner or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA Service Partner” - A Workshop that has been contractually authorised
by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to service ŠKODA vehicles and to
sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA Partner” - A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its
sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to serv-
ice them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Text notes
“Press” - Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
“Hold” - Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Explanation of symbols
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor-

mation and safety warnings
 Situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible
® Trademark
 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
 Text display in the segment display
→ Marker to the next operation step

WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.

CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.

Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.

Notes 7
Structure of the Owner's Manual and further
information

Structure of the manual


The Owner's Manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
■ Section (e.g. operating instructions) - the title of the section is shown down
in the left-hand corner
■ Main chapter (e.g. checking and refilling) - the title of the main chapter is
shown down in the right-hand corner
■ Chapter (e.g. engine oil)
■  Introductory information - Module overview within the chapter, in-
troductory information about the chapter content and, where appropri-
ate, information relevant to the whole chapter
■ Module (e.g. checking and refilling)

Information Search
When searching for information in the Owner´s Manual, we recommend using
the Index at the end of the manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Units
The volume, weight, speed and length data are given in metric units, unless
otherwise indicated.
Display
In this Owner's Manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis-
play illustration, provided nothing is otherwise stated.
Help in an emergency
In case of breakdown, the breakdown service contact information required can
be found in the following places.
▶ Contact details for the ŠKODA Partner (e.g. window sticker)
▶ Infotainment (Telephone - breakdown service / information service menu)
▶ ŠKODA mobile application
▶ ŠKODA web pages

8 Structure of the Owner's Manual and further information


Abbreviations Abbreviation Definition
TSI Petrol engine with turbo charging and direct injection
Abbreviation Definition
VIN Vehicle identification number
rpm Engine revolutions per minute W Watt, unit of power
ABS Anti-lock brake system Wi-Fi wireless data network
AG Automatic gearbox
AGM Vehicle battery type
TCS Traction control
CO2 Carbon dioxide
COC Declaration of conformity
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
EDL Electronic differential lock
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
EPC EPC fault light
ESC Electronic Stability Control
ET Rim depth
EU European Union
HBA Hydraulic brake assist
HHC Uphill start assist
KESSY Keyless unlocking, starting and locking
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for output
LED Lighting element type
MCB Multi-collision brake
MG Manual gearbox
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection
MSR Engine drag torque control
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta-
N1
tion of goods
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
PIN personal identification number
Diesel engine with turbo charging and common rail injection
TDI CR
system
TSA Trailer stabilisation

Abbreviations 9
▶ Protect children using a suitable child seat » page 19, Transporting children
Safety safely.
▶ Adopt the correct seated position. Tell your passengers to assume the cor-
Passive Safety rect seated position » page 10, Correct and safe seated position.

General information Driving safety


 Introduction
For safety in traffic, the following precautions must be observed.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g. by
your passengers or mobile phone calls).
Before setting off 10 ▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
Driving safety 10 cohol, drugs or similar).
In this section of the instructions you will find important information on the ▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
subject of passive safety. We have combined everything here which you ▶ Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of ▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
children and anything similar.
Other important safety information can also be found in the subsequent sec- Correct and safe seated position
tions of this Owner's Manual. The Owner's Manual should therefore always be
kept in the vehicle.  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Before setting off
The correct seating position for the driver 11
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please Adjusting the steering wheel position 11
pay attention to the following points before setting off. Correct seating position for the front passenger 12
▶ Check the lights and turn signal lights are functioning correctly. Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats 12
▶ Check the wiper function and the wiper blades for wear. Check the wind-
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
screen washer fluid level.
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
that the mirrors are not covered. The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure. served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level. ▶ Do not lean against the dash panel.
▶ Secure all items of luggage. ▶ Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
vehicle. served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid. ▶ Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
▶ Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals. ▶ Do not sit facing to one side.
▶ Do not lean out of the window.
▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window.
▶ Do not put your feet on the seat cushion. 

10 Safety
WARNING  Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
■ The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headr-
body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to ests) » Fig. 2 - B .
provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.  Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12, Using seat belts.
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 19, Transporting children safely with a WARNING
suitable restraint system. ■ A distance of least 25 cm to the steering wheel should be maintained,
■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this otherwise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - hazard!
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of ■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
injury! er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 2. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
WARNING middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, you could
sustain serious injury to the arms, hands and head if the airbag is activated.
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries. ■ Ensure there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get be-
hind the pedals while driving. You would then no longer be able to operate
The correct seating position for the driver the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Fig. 2 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel posi-
tion
Fig. 3 Adjusting the steering wheel position
 Read and observe on page 11 first.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,  Read and observe on page 11 first.
the following instructions must be observed.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs. › Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 3.
 Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle. › Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in direction of arrow 2 .
 Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 2 - A .
› Pull the holder until it stops in arrow direction 3 . 

Passive Safety 11
WARNING
Seat belts
■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary! Using seat belts
■ The safety lever must always be locked so that the steering wheel cannot
accidentally change position – risk of accident!  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct seating position for the front passenger
Correct routing of seat belt 13
 Read and observe on page 11 first. Fastening and unfastening seat belts 14
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow- Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
ing instructions must be observed. accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
 Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas- in the event of a major accident.
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed. extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well re-
 Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same sult in severe injuries.
level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 2 on page 11 B (not for seats
When transporting a child the following instructions must be observed
with integrated headrests).
» page 19, Transporting children safely.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
WARNING
WARNING
■ Fasten seat belts before every ride! This also applies to other passengers
■ A distance of least 25 cm to the dashboard should be maintained, other-
- there is a danger of injury!
wise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - hazard! ■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
» page 10, Correct and safe seated position.
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the ■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be- otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
WARNING
seated position!
Information on dealing with the safety belts
■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
 Read and observe on page 11 first.

For the safety of the passengers in the rear seats, and to reduce the risk of WARNING
injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed. Information on the proper use of the safety belts
 Adjust the headrest such that the top edge of the headrest is at the same ■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 2 on page 11 B . belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – on no ac-
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12, Using seat belts. count across your neck. 

12 Safety
WARNING (Continued) Correct routing of seat belt
■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to-
gether.
■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
■ Do not use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for shorten-
ing the belts for smaller persons).
■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 63. Fig. 4 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Rout-
ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
pair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 122.
■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If damage to
the parts of the seat belt system (e.g. the strap, the belt connectors, the
retractor, the lock or similar) are detected, the seat belt in question must
be replaced immediately by a specialist.
■ Seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident should be
replaced by a specialist garage. The anchorage points for the belts should Fig. 5 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
also be checked.
 Read and observe on page 12 first.

It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder belt should be positioned approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (on no account across your neck) and lie flush to the chest » Fig. 4 -
.
The lower part of the belt should run across the pelvis (it should not lie on top
of the stomach) and must always fit snugly » Fig. 4 - .
For pregnant women, the lower part of the belt must be positioned as low
down as possible across the pelvis, to avoid exerting any pressure on the low-
er abdomen » Fig. 4 - . 

Seat belts 13
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats › Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 6 -  until it
› Push the return pulley upwards in the direction of arrow » Fig. 5 - . audibly clicks into place.
› Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows 1 and push the › Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 5 - .
Release
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has › Grip the lock tongue and press the red button in the buckle » Fig. 6 - , the
correctly locked in place.
lock tongue pops out.
WARNING › Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat webbing rolls up fully.
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even WARNING
in minor accidents.
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
The reel opening for the lock tongue must not be blocked otherwise the
lock tongue will not lock into place properly.
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. pencils,
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
spectacles, pens, keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
 Introduction
Fastening and unfastening seat belts This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Inertia reels 14
Belt tensioners 14

Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts
also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill
and when cornering.
Fig. 6 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 12 first. If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Before fastening the belt
› Adjust the headrest properly (does not apply to seats with integrated headr-
ests). Belt tensioners
› Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats). Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
› Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats). by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
Fasten belts. 
› Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.

14 Safety
If there is a collision of a certain severity, the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Airbag system
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor collisions, in the case Description of the airbag system
of a roll-over and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
 Introduction
WARNING
■ Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and instal- This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
lation of system components because of other repair work, must only be System description 15
carried out by a specialist garage. Airbag deployment 16
■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
Safety instructions 17
the entire system.
The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional oc-
Note cupant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions.
■ The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened. The airbag will only provide optimum protection in conjunction with wearing
■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in- the seat belt - the airbag is not a substitute for the seat belts.
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 
in the instrument cluster » page 32.

System description

Fig. 7 Airbag installation points

Airbag installation points » Fig. 7


A Front airbags
B Side airbags
C Head airbags 

Airbag system 15
Front airbags - the forward thrust of the driver and of the front passenger is Airbag deployment
cushioned when they make contact with the fully-inflated airbag, and the risk
of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
The front airbags can be identified by the lettering  featured on the steer-
ing wheel and on the dashboard on the passenger side.
Side airbags - the load of the occupants is cushioned when plunged into the
fully inflated airbag. The risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach
and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
The side airbags can be identified by a label with the lettering  marked on
the front seat backrests.
Head airbags - the forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes
contact with the fully inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to head and chest is
thus reduced.
The head airbags are provided with the lettering  marked on the B-pillar Fig. 8 Inflated airbags
cladding.
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts. When triggered, the airbag fills with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the air-
▶ Individual airbags. bag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
▶ Warning light  in the instrument cluster » page 32.
When the airbag inflates, smoke is released. This is not a sign of a fire in the
▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 18.
vehicle.
▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 18. Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. The important factors here are the hard-
ness of the object with which the vehicle collides, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed etc.
A decisive factor in the deployment of the airbags is the degree of deceleration
at the time. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during
the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the
control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer
severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
▶ Driver’s front airbag.
▶ Front passenger airbag. 

16 Safety
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision. WARNING
▶ Front side airbag.
Information about the front airbags
▶ Head airbag.
■ For the driver and front passenger, it is important to maintain a distance

When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur. of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or to the dashboard » Fig. 9 - A , If
▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on. you do not keep this distance, the airbag system cannot protect you -
▶ All the doors are unlocked. There is a risk to life! The front seats and the head restraints must always
▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted. also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is ■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing

switched on - position ). child seat on the front passenger seat » page 18, Airbag deactivation. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
When there is no air bag deployment? injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed.
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle ■ No other persons, animals or objects should be placed in front of the oc-
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment. cupants in the front seats in the deployment area of the front airbags.
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the dashboard on the passenger
Safety instructions side must not be stickered, covered or modified in any way. No parts (e.g.
cup holders, mobile phone mounts and the like) may be mounted near the
Fig. 9 airbag installation points and in the airbag deployment area.
■ Never place objects on the surface of the dashboard on the passenger
Safe distance from the steering
wheel and dashboard side.

WARNING
Information about for side and head airbags
■ No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be loca-
ted in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury!
■ Hang only light clothing on the hooks in the vehicle, do not leave any
WARNING
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. Do not use hangers to hang up the
General information
clothes.
■ The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer optimum protection
■ No excessive force, e.g. through blows, kicks etc. should be applied to the
if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 10.
seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side airbags. The side air-
■ The airbag unleashes enormous force when triggered, which can lead to
bags would not be deployed in such a case!
serious injuries or fatalities if the driver and passengers are not seated ■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
properly. This applies in particular to children who are transported without
ger seats must only be of a type expressly authorised by ŠKODA AUTO. In
using a suitable child safety seat » page 21.
view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use
■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
protective function of the side airbag.
the event of an accident. ■ Any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installation
■ If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must then be replaced.
points for the side airbags should be immediately repaired by a specialist
■ The surface of the steering wheel and the dashboard should only be
company. 
cleaned with a dry or slightly dampened cloth in the area of the front air-
bags.

Airbag system 17
WARNING WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system If an airbag is deactivated at the time of the vehicle being sold, the pur-
■ Any work on the airbag system, including the installation and removal of chaser must be informed!
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel), must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
» page 116. Deactivating the front passenger airbag
■ No changes of any sort should be made to parts of the airbag system, the
front bumper or the bodywork.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.

Airbag deactivation

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 10 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
Deactivating airbags 18
light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 18
Switch positions » Fig. 10 - 
Deactivating airbags  The front passenger airbag has been deactivated - the warning light1)
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch » Fig. 10lights up after switching on the ignition- 
» Fig. 10 on page 18 - .  The front passenger airbag is activated - the warning light does not light
up when the ignition is turned on  
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags. Switch off
A warning light indicates that the airbag has been deactivated» page 32.
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below. › Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
▶ If a child seat must be used on the front passenger seat, where the child is › Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
transported facing towards the rear» page 19. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
▶ If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid- › Pull the key out of the slot in the switch » .
dle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
adjusted. › Check that the warning light   lights up after the ignition is switched on.
▶ If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
Switching on
of a physical disability.
▶ If different seats have been fitted (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side air-
› Switch off the ignition.
bags).
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side. 

1) The warning light   comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, goes out for about
1 second and then comes on again.

18 Safety
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » . Transporting children safely
› Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position . Child seat
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.  Introduction
› Check that the warning light   does not light up after the ignition is
switched on. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, children should only be transported
in child seats!
WARNING
■ The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag could be Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 20
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death! Use of a child seat on the front seat 21
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
Child safety and the side airbag 21
ed off.
Classification of child seats 21
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag. Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt 21
■ If the   warning light is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not Please refer to the instructions in this Owner's Manual and the child seat man-
be deployed in an accident! Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ufacturer's instructions with regard to the installation and use of the child
garage immediately. seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport children on the
CAUTION
rear seats. Only transport a child on the passenger seat in exceptional circum-
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch! stances.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
standard must be used.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number
below.

WARNING
■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■ When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
In an emergency, they might not be able to get out of the vehicle on their
own or help themselves. Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants. 

Transporting children safely 19


WARNING (Continued) Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the Does not apply to Taiwan
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
Fig. 11 Warning labels
head restraints so that they are as high as possible.
■ If the headrests still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
 Read and observe on page 19 first.
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 64. After re-
moving the child seat, refit the head restraints. Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protec-
ted by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, even
Note death.
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories. This warning is also given on stickers that are located in the following places.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles. ▶ On the passenger sun visor » Fig. 11 - .
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard. ▶ On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 11 – .
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
▶ It is essential to deactivate the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in
which the child is transported with its back facing the direction of travel » .
▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
▶ Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
▶ With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side. 

20 Safety
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not Child safety and the side airbag
“jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of in-
jury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
Fig. 13
WARNING Incorrect seated position of a
■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas- child who is not properly secured
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy- – risk from the side airbag/Child
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se- properly protected by safety seat
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ Once a child seat in which the child is transported with its back to the di-
rection of travel is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag should be reactivated.
 Read and observe on page 19 first.
Use of a child seat on the front seat The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
Applies to Taiwan » Fig. 13 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
Fig. 12 the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as
Warning labels possible » Fig. 13 - .

Classification of child seats


 Read and observe on page 19 first.

Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.


Group Weight of the child
 Read and observe on page 19 first. 0 up to 10 kg
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat. 0 up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » Fig. 12.
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg

Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
 Read and observe on page 19 first.

Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard. 

Transporting children safely 21


Front passenger Rear seats Rear seat  is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.
Group
seat External Centre There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the child
0 in place using the -system » Fig. 14.
U U U
up to 10 kg
WARNING
0
U U U ■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
up to 13 kg
when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
1 ■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
U U U
9-18 kg eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the -system – risk
2 of death!
U U Ua)
15-25 kg
3 Note
U U Ua)
22-36 kg ■ A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
a) If the middle rear seat is not provided with a headrest, then a child seat of Group 2 or 3 is only to be used ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
if this has its own built-in headrest. If the child seat of Group 2 or 3 does not have its own built-in head- hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
rest, the child seat must be attached to the outer rear seat. ■ Child seats with the -system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
U “Universal” child seat category - a child seat designed to be attached to cessories.
the seat using the seat belt.

Fastening systems

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attachment points of the -system 22
Use of child safety seats with the  system 23
Attachment points of the  -system 24

Attachment points of the  -system

Fig. 14
Labels of the system 

22 Safety
Use of child safety seats with the  system
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.

Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.

Size class of
Group Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
the child seata)
0
E X IL-SU X
up to 10 kg
E
0
D X IL-SU X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1 IL-SU
B X X
9-18 kg IUF
B1
A
2
- X IL-SU X
15-25 kg
3
- X IL-SU X
22-36 kg
a) The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.

IL-SU The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in in the “Semi-Universal”category. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat
with the -system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a  child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the   system belt.
X The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points.

Transporting children safely 23


Attachment points of the   -system

Fig. 15
Attachment points of the 
-system

  is a fastening system, which restricts the movement of the upper part
of the child seat.
The locking eyes A for attaching the belt of a child seat with the   sys-
tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 15.

WARNING
■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
■ Only use child seats with the  -system on the seats with the lock-
ing eyes.
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.

24 Safety
Transporting children safely 25
Fig. 16 Cockpit example for LHD models

26 Using the system


23 Bonnet release lever 126
Using the system 24 Steering wheel locking lever 11
Cockpit 25 Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Ignition lock 84
▶ Starter button 84
Overview
26 Storage compartment 67
1 Electric windows 52 27 Handbrake lever 87
2 Door opening lever 48 28 Depending on equipment fitted:
3 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 62 ▶ Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 88
4 Air outlet nozzles 82 ▶ Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 89
5 Ticket holder 66 29 Cup holder 68
6 Operating lever (depending on equipment): 30 AUX / USB input 67
▶ Direction and high beam 55 31 Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
▶ Speed regulating system 100 ▶  Left seat heating 65
▶ Speed limiter 101 ▶  Traction control (TCS) 94
7 Steering wheel with horn / with driver's front airbag 15 ▶  Parking aid 96
8 Buttons for operating the information system 37 ▶  Central locking system 47
▶  Rear window heater 59
9 Instrument cluster 28
▶  START STOP 85
10 Operating lever: ▶  Windscreen heater
▶ Windscreen wipers and washers
59
60 ▶  Right seat heating
▶ Information system
65
37
32 Controls for heating / air conditioning 79
11 Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Storage compartment 67 Note
▶ Infotainment » Owner's Manual for Infotainment
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
12 Button for hazard warning light system 57 that shown in this layout» Fig. 16.
13 Warning light for the front passenger airbag 18
14 Interior rear-view mirror 61
15 Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 18
16 Front passenger airbag 15
17 External Infotainment module (in the front passenger storage
compartment) » Owner's Manual - Infotainment
18 Storage compartment on the front passenger side 71
19 Electric window in the front passenger door 52
20 Storage compartments 67
21 Light switch 54
22 Headlight range control (in the dashboard) 54

Cockpit 27
1 Engine revolutions counter » page 28
Instruments and warning lights ▶ with indicator lights » page 29

Instrument cluster 2 Display » page 37


3 Speedometer
 Introduction ▶ with indicator lights » page 29
4 Bar with indicator lights » page 29
5 Operation key:
▶ Set the time » page 38
▶ Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 37
▶ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
» page 42
6 Coolant temperature gauge » page 29
7 Fuel gauge » page 29
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to
switch on the lights in due time.
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be activated/deactivated in the
Fig. 17 Instrument cluster - Version 1
» Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.

Rev counter
The tachometer 1 » Fig. 17 on page 28 or » Fig. 18 on page 28 shows the ac-
tual engine speed per minute.
The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maxi-
mum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D / S on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 38.

CAUTION
Fig. 18 Instrument cluster - Version 2 The rev counter pointer may only move into the red area for a short time - oth-
erwise risk of engine damage!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rev counter 28
Coolant temperature gauge 29
Fuel gauge 29

28 Using the system


Coolant temperature gauge If the fuel level reaches the reserve level A or B , the warning light  illumi-
nates in the instrument cluster» page 33.
Fig. 19 WARNING
Coolant temperature gauge For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident!

CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel can
cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the ex-
haust system.
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 1 » Fig. 17 on page 28.
Note
The display » Fig. 19 only works if the ignition is switched on.
■ After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous
Cold range - the pointer is in the range A , the engine has not yet reached its curves, braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indi-
operating temperature. Avoid high speeds and high engine loads. cates a fraction less.
Operating range - the pointer is in the range B . ■ The arrow  next to the symbol  within the fuel gauge displays the installa-
tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
High temperature range - the pointer is in the range C . The coolant tempera-
ture is too high. The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster
» page 35. Warning lights

Fuel gauge  Introduction


This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Handbrake 30
Braking system 30
 Front seat belt warning light 30
  Power steering / steering lock (engine start push-button) 31
 Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS) 31
 Traction control (TCS) deactivated 32
 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 32
 Rear fog light 32
Fig. 20 Fuel gauge: in the instrument cluster / the display of the instru-  Emission control system 32
ment cluster Preheating unit (diesel) 32
 Control of the engine electronics (petrol engine) 32
The display » Fig. 20 only works if the ignition is switched on.  Airbag system 32
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres.  Tyre pressure 33
 Fuel reserve 33 

Instruments and warning lights 29


  Turn signal system 33 WARNING
 Trailer turn signal lights 34 ■ Ignoring illuminated indicator lights and related messages or instructions
 Fog lights 34 in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or
 Speed regulating system / Speed limiter 34 damage to the vehicle.
 Brake pedal (automatic transmission) 34 ■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe

 Main beam 34 distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
 Automatic gearbox 34 warning lights » page 57. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed
distance.
 Rear seat belt warning light 34
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
 Generator 35 warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
 Coolant 35 gine compartment » page 125, Engine compartment.
 Engine oil pressure 35
 Engine oil level 35
 Lamp failure 36
 Handbrake
 Diesel particle filter (diesel) 36  Read and observe on page 30 first.
 Windscreen washer fluid level 36
  START-STOP system 36  lights up – the hand brake has been applied.
 Display of a low temperature 36 An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the
 Distance warning (Front Assist) 37 handbrake is still on.
 Advance warning / emergency braking (Front Assist) 37 ▶ Release the handbrake.
 Service 37
The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or Braking system
faults.  Read and observe on page 30 first.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.  illuminates – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low.
▶ Park the vehicle,  do not continue to drive! Seek help from a specialist ga-
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go rage.
out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
WARNING
The warning lights are at the following locations in the instrument cluster A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance -
» Fig. 17 on page 28 or » Fig. 18 on page 28. risk of accident!
▶ Engine revolutions counter 1
▶ Display 2
▶ Speedometer 3  Front seat belt warning light
▶ Bar with warning lights 4
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
Warning lights in the display
Depending on the importance the warning light  (danger) or  (warning) illu-  lights up - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
minate along with some of the warning lights in the list with the warning At a speed of over 25 km/h, the warning light  flashes and an audible warning
lights 4 » Fig. 17 on page 28 and » Fig. 18 on page 28. sounds at the same time. 

30 Using the system


If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next Disconnecting the vehicle battery
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light  If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning
illuminates permanently. light  illuminates after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
  Power steering / steering lock (engine start push-button)
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
 Read and observe on page 30 first. out, there is a system error.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
Fault in the power steering
 lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the specialist garage immediately.
steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
 Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS)
 lights up – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces can be greater.  Read and observe on page 30 first.
▶ Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance.
 flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently active.
▶ If the warning light  does not go off, stop the vehicle,  do not continue to
drive. Seek help from a specialist garage. System fault
▶ If the warning light  does not go out, it is possible to continue driving with  lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault.
due caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
Steering lock defective (engine start push-button) specialist garage immediately.
An audible signal sounds as a warning. If the warning light  comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
 Steering column lock faulty. Stop! switched off for technical reasons.
 flashes ▶ Switch the ignition off and on again.
 STOP VEHICLE STEERING FAULTY
▶ Park the vehicle, and  stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no If the warning light  does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components the ASR is fully functional again.
(e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine. Disconnecting the vehicle battery
Seek help from a specialist garage. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
 Steering lock: Workshop! light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
 flashes
 STEERING WORKSHOP The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
specialist garage immediately. ror.
Steering lock not unlocked (engine start push-button) ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
 Move the steering wheel! specialist garage immediately.
 flashes
 MOVE STEERING WHEEL For more information on the ESC system » page 94, Stability Control (ESC) or
▶ Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock- TCS system » page 94, Traction control (TCS).
ing the steering lock.
▶ If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is
required.

Instruments and warning lights 31


 Traction control (TCS) deactivated Preheating unit (diesel)
 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

 illuminates – the TCS system is disabled.  flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc-
 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) tion in engine performance.

 Read and observe on page 30 first. There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light  does not come
on or illuminates continuously.
 lights up – there is an ABS fault. ▶ It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS. specialist garage immediately.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
 Control of the engine electronics (petrol engine)

WARNING
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
■ If the warning light  illuminates simultaneously with warning light   lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
» page 30, Braking system,  do not continue your journey! Seek help makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable
from a specialist garage. reduction in engine performance.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
▶ It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
specialist garage immediately.

 Rear fog light  Airbag system


 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

 lights up – the rear fog light is switched on. System fault


 lights up - there is a fault in the airbag system.
 Emission control system  Error: Airbag
 Read and observe on page 30 first.  AIRBAG ERROR
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.
 lights up – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
reduction in engine performance.  illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
specialist garage immediately. tool
 illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
flashes for approximately 12 seconds. 

32 Using the system


 Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated. ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
 AIRBAG/ BELT TENSIONER OFF specialist garage immediately.

WARNING Other incidents


The illumination of the warning light  can have the following reasons.
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not ▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be ▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
checked immediately by a specialized garage.
when driving uphill or downhill).
▶ Snow chains are mounted.
 Tyre pressure ▶ A wheel has been changed.

 Read and observe on page 30 first. CAUTION


Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
Change of tyre pressure values roads) the warning light  in the instrument cluster may be delayed or not
 lights up - there was a pressure change in one of the tyres. light up at all.
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
▶ Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-  Fuel reserve
vres.  Read and observe on page 30 first.
▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 134.  illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approxi-
▶ Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the affected wheel mately 7 litres).
» page 139 or use the repair kit » page 143.
▶ Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 106.
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
▶ Please refuel » page 124.
System fault
 flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in Note
the tyre pressure monitoring system. The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light  flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system
  Turn signal system
error.  Read and observe on page 30 first.
▶ It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
 flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
specialist garage immediately.
 flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
light  comes on after switching on the ignition. its normal rate (does not apply when towing).
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance. When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.

Instruments and warning lights 33


 Trailer turn signal lights   Illumi-  Gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
nates  GEARBOX OVERHEATED
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
The gearbox has over-heated, continued driving is possible with appropriate
 flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on. caution.
If a trailer is hitched and the warning light  is not flashing, one of the trailer   Illumi-  Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
turn signal lights has failed. nates  STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT
▶ Check the trailer bulbs. ▶ Do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
 Fog lights
▶ Ifthe warning light does not go out,  do not continue driving! Seek help
 Read and observe on page 30 first. from a specialist garage.
 illuminates – the fog lights are switched on. Transmission problem
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
 Speed regulating system / Speed limiter   Illumi-  Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely!
 Read and observe on page 30 first. nates  GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP
▶ Park the vehicle,  do not continue to drive!. Seek help from a specialist ga-
 illuminates - the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulating system
rage.
and/or the adaptive cruise control or by the speed limiter.
 flashes – the speed set with the speed limiter has been exceeded.   Illumi-  Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear.
nates  GEARBOX ERROR REV_ GEAR NOT AVAIL
 Brake pedal (automatic transmission)   Illumi-  Error: gearbox. Speed is limited.
nates  GEARBOX ERROR
 Read and observe on page 30 first. ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
 lights up – apply the brake. specialist garage immediately.

 Main beam  Rear seat belt warning light

 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

 lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on.  lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
 lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened.
 Automatic gearbox
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
 Read and observe on page 30 first. and indicates the current belt status!

Gearbox overheated
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.

34 Using the system


 Generator  Engine oil pressure
 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

 lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.   flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low.
▶ As the vehicle discharges while driving, all non-essential electrical loads (e.g. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
Infotainment) should be switched off. ▶ Even if the oil level is correct,  do not drive any further if the warning light
▶ It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a is flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
specialist garage immediately. ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.

CAUTION CAUTION
If in addition to the light  the light  lights up while driving,  stop driving - If, under the given conditions, it is not possible to top up with engine oil,  do
risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a spe- not continue driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine
cialist garage. and seek assistance from a specialist garage.

 Coolant  Engine oil level


 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

Coolant level too low Engine oil level too low


  Illumi-  Check engine coolant! Log book!   Illumi-  Oil level: add oil!
nates  ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK nates  ADD OIL
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
▶ Check the coolant level » page 130, Checking and refilling. if necessary.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light  illumi- The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
nates again, there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan. onds. If the engine oil is not replenished, the warning light will come on again
▶ Switch after driving about 100 km.
off the ignition.
▶ Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary. Engine oil level too high
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light  illumi-   Illumi-  Reduce oil level!
nates again,  do not continue driving! nates  OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Coolant temperature too high
  Illumi-  Engine overheated. Stop! Log book! Fault on the engine oil level sensor
nates  ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP   Illumi-  Oil sensor: Workshop!
nates  OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down.
▶ Continue your journey only after the warning light  has disappeared. ▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately. 

Instruments and warning lights 35


CAUTION WARNING
If, under the given conditions, it is not possible to top up with engine oil,  do ■ Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-
not continue driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine rain and traffic conditions.
and seek assistance from a specialist garage. ■ The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
 Lamp failure vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact
with flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled
 Read and observe on page 30 first. fuel or the like.
  illuminates – one of the lamps is faulty.
CAUTION
A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp. ■ As long as the warning light  illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
 Diesel particle filter (diesel) ■ Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
Note
soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a
regular basis. We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the com-
bustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter.
  illuminates – the filter is clogged with soot.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for  Windscreen washer fluid level
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light  goes out.
 placed 4. or 5. gear (automatic gearbox: position D / S).
 Read and observe on page 30 first.

 Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.   illuminates – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
 Engine speed between 1,800-2,500 rpm. ▶ Top up the windscreen washer fluid » page 127.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light  extinguishes.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and   START-STOP system
the warning light  begins to flash.  Read and observe on page 30 first.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately. The warning lights   indicates the state of the START STOP system
» page 85, START-STOPsystem.

 Display of a low temperature


 Read and observe on page 30 first.

 illuminates – the outside temperature is below +4 °C. 

36 Using the system


WARNING
Information system
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road
surface! You should therefore not only rely on the outside temperature dis- Driver information system
play for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
 Introduction
 Distance warning (Front Assist) This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe on page 30 first. Display in the instrument cluster 37
Setting the clock 38
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
Gear recommendation 38
 illuminates – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini- Auto Check Control 38
mum.
Information on the Front Assist system» page 102. Display in the instrument cluster

 Advance warning / emergency braking (Front Assist)


 Read and observe on page 30 first.

 illuminates – the system has recognized the risk of a collision or automati-


cally triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre» page 102.

 Service
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
Fig. 21 Display types: MAXI DOT / segment display
 illuminates – information regarding a service appointment that is due
» page 42, Service interval display. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 21.
1 Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control
2 Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Compass display1)
3 Driving data (multifunction display)
Warning lights
Information messages 

1) Applies to vehicles with factory-installed navigation system.

Information system 37
Door alarm › Switch on the ignition.
Service interval display › Press and hold the button A » Fig. 22 until the time is shown in the display.
4 Outside temperature › Release the button A and the system switches to the hour setting function.
5 Speed regulating system / speed limiter › Press the button A again and set the hours.
Total distance travelled › Wait around 4 seconds - the system switches to the minutes setting.
6 Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
› Press the button A again and set the minutes.
7 Time
› Wait around 4 seconds - the system switches to the initial setting.
8 Warning lights of the START-STOP system The time can also be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox Gear recommendation
9 Outside temperature
Warning lights Fig. 23
Driving data (multifunction display) Information on the selected
10 Total distance travelled gear / Gear recommendation
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Speed regulating system / speed limiter
Service interval display
Information messages
11 Fuel gauge
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
appears in the display. efficiency.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a Display » Fig. 23
door is open.
 Optimal gear engaged
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)  Gear recommendation (e.g.    means that it is advantageous to switch
› Press button A » Fig. 22 on page 38. from 3rd to 4th gear)
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
Setting the clock shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.

Fig. 22 WARNING
Button in the instrument cluster The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations (e.g. when overtaking).

Auto Check Control


Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster. 

38 Using the system


As long as the faults are not rectified the messages are always shown. After Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
the message is displayed for the first time, the warning lights  (danger) or   Switch on/off voice control
(warning) continue to be displayed. A Turn - sets the volume
Press - sound on / off
Operation of the information system  Skip to next track/station
 Switch to previous track/station
Operation via the operating lever
 Display the assistance systems menu
 Press - display the telephone menu; accept/end the call; select contact
Fig. 24 Hold - repeat last call; reject call
Buttons on the control lever
Operating the multifunction display
B Turn - select data / set values
Press show / confirm entry
Operating the MAXI DOT display
 Hold - display main menu
Press - return to a previous level in the menu
B Turn - move in the selected menu
Operating the multifunction display Press - confirm selected menu item
A Press (up or down) - select data / set values
B Press show / confirm entry Note
Depending on equipment not all functions may be available. The system can
Operating the MAXI DOT display
indicate this fact by a text message in the display of the instrument cluster or
A Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu
in the Infotainment display.
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
B Press - confirm selected menu item
Driving data (Multifunction display)
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Information overview 40
Warning when exceeding the set speed 40
Memory 40
The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on. After
the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switch-
ing off the ignition is displayed.
If vehicles with MAXI DOTdisplay do not show the driving data after switching
Fig. 25 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel on the ignition, select the menu item Driving data in the main menu and confirm
» page 41, MAXI DOT display. 

Information system 39
The units and the display of some information can be set in Infotainment Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
» Owner´s Manual - Infotainment. › Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
› The desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps.
Information overview › Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca- › Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value › Drive at the desired speed.
can increase. › Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
Average fuel consumption - is calculated continuously since the last clearing The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
of the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 100
m driven. Reset speed limit
Current fuel consumption - when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly,
› Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (in models in some countries the fol-
› By confirming the speed stored in the memory, the speed limit is reset.
lowing appears --,- km/l). The set driving mode remains stored even after switching the ignition on and
off. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
Oil temperature - if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in deactivated.
the system for checking the oil temperature, the  symbols are displayed.
Warning when the preset speed is exceeded - allows the setting of a speed Memory
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message
appears on the display of the instrument cluster. Fig. 26
Current speed - digital speedometer. Memory display: MAXI DOT dis-
play () / Segment display ()
Average speed - value constantly recalculated, for distance since last clearing
the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Distance driven - distance driven since the memory was last cleared.
Driving time - driving time since last clearing the memory.
Coolant temperature - if the coolant temperature is in the range 70-120 °C, the
The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are
engine operating temperature has been reached. If the temperature is below
displayed at the position A » Fig. 26.
70 ° C, high engine speeds and straining the engine should be avoided. If the
temperature is above 120 ° C, the warning light  illuminates in the instrument Since start () or “1” ()
cluster » page 35. Driving data is stored from when the ignition is switched on to when it is
switched off. If the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the igni-
Warning when exceeding the set speed tion, new data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving informa-
tion.
The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
display of the instrument cluster. erased. 

40 Using the system


Long-term () and “2” () Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to ■ Driving data » page 39
a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 kilometres driven. ■ Assist systems » page 42
■ Navigation » page 41
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is
■ Audio » page 41
exceeded.
■ Telephone » page 42;
Since refuel () or “3” () ■ Vehicle » page 38, Auto Check Control
The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling.
Note
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up. ■ If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
› For the storage choice, repeatedly confirm the selected indication and select to access the main menu.
the desired memory. ■ The display language can also be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - In-
› For deleting the memory for the selected information, hold down the button fotainment.
confirming the specification. ■ For vehicles without Infotainment, the display language can only be adjusted
by a specialist garage.
The following Driving data is stored in different memory banks.
▶ Average fuel consumption.
▶ Distance driven. Menu itemNavigation
▶ Average speed.
The following information is displayed in the Navigation menu item.
▶ Driving time.
▶ Driving recommendations
Note ▶ Compass
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data. ▶ Last destinations

MAXI DOT display Menu itemAudio


The following information is displayed in the Audio menu item.
 Introduction
Radio
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ▶ Currently playing station (name/frequency).
▶ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the sta-
Menu itemNavigation 41
Menu itemAudio 41 tion button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
▶ List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
Menu itemTelephone 42
▶ TP traffic announcements.
Menu itemAssist systems 42
Media
The MAXI DOT display is a user interface which, depending on the equipment ▶ Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the multifunction
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
display, the assistance systems etc.
tag on the audio source.
The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 39.

Information system 41
Menu itemTelephone Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the Telephone menu item.
Fig. 27
 Incoming call
Button in the instrument cluster
 Outgoing call
 Missed call
Symbols in the display
 Charge status of the telephone battery1)
 Signal strength1)
 A telephone is connected to the unit
 Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown
next to the symbol)
› Switch on the ignition.
› Press and hold the A » Fig. 27 button until the Service menu item is shown in
 Switch-off microphone the display.
› Release the button A.
Menu itemAssist systems
In the display, the symbol  appears for 4 seconds along with the following
In the menu item Assist systems, the Front Assist system can be activated/deac- message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
tivated. The details regarding the remaining kilometres or days until the next sched-
uled service can also be displayed in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - In-
Service interval display fotainment.

 Introduction Service messages


This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Messages before reaching the scheduled service date
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval 42 Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol  as well as a mes-
Service messages 42 sage about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the dis-
play after switching on the ignition.
Resetting the service interval display 43
Messages upon reaching scheduled service date
The service interval display shows the kilometres or days until the next service
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol  appears in the display after
event.
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
Information regarding the service intervals » page 117.

1) This function is only supported by some mobile phones.

42 Using the system


Resetting the service interval display Read in the QR code » Fig. 28 using the respective application on your external
device or enter the following address in the web browser to open the website
We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage. with an overview of the available applications, compatible devices and other
information about SmartGate.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi- http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartgate
cle.
CAUTION
Variable service interval ■ To increase the access security to the transmitted vehicle data, once the
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv- ŠKODA application has been started, you are requested to change the pass-
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis- word/PIN code if the default password/PIN code has not yet been changed
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle. » page 44, Password/PIN code. It is not possible to start the ŠKODA applica-
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating tion without changing it.
conditions of the vehicle. ■ ŠKODA accepts no responsibility for any problems caused by incompatibility
or improper functioning of the external devices.
SmartGate
Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi
Introduction to the subject This type of connection is intended for external devices running Android and
iOS operating systems.
Fig. 28
QR code with reference to the Connecting to an Android external device
ŠKODA websites › Switch on the ignition.
› Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for
available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner´s Manual for the external device).
› In the menu of the detected networks, select the “SmartGate_...” menu item.
1)

› Enter the password (vehicle identification number using uppercase let-


ters» page 44).
› In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate appli-
cation.
SmartGate is a system that transmits certain driving data (such as fuel con- › Then follow the instructions in the manual, which is included in the
sumption, speed or similar) via Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct. SmartGate application.
The ŠKODA applications installed in a supported external device (e.g. tele- With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simul-
phone, tablet) give the option to further transmit the received data. taneously using Wi-Fi, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as required.
Some ŠKODA applications can be displayed in the Infotainment display by Connecting to an external iOS device
means of a SmartLinkconnection » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for
available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner´s Manual for the external device).
› In the menu of the detected networks, select the “SmartGate_...”1) menu item. 

1) The last 6 characters of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position ....

Information system 43
› Enter the password (vehicle identification number using uppercase let- If you want to connect to SmartGate in a different vehicle, you must make a
ters» page 44). new connection in the SmartGate application.
With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simul- Disconnection
taneously using Wi-Fi. In these external devices, up to four ŠKODA applications The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways.
can be started simultaneously.
› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
Disconnection button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways. › End the connection in the SmartGate application.
› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter › Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device.
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door). Automatic connection
› End the connection in the SmartGate application. If the external device once had a connection with SmartGate, then the connec-
› Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device. tion is automatically restored after the ignition is started.
Automatic connection
If the communication device has already had a connection with SmartGate, SmartGate web interface
then the connection is automatically restored under the following conditions. SmartGate parameters can be set in the SmartGate web interface.
 The ignition is switched on. The following address must be entered in the web browser of the external de-
 Wi-Fi is switched on in the external device that is to be connected to. vice that is connected with SmartGate.
 The external device that is to be connected to stores the password re-
HTTP://192.168.123.1
quired for the connection check.
The setting changes are only effective after tapping the buttons “Save” →
Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi direct “Reboot”.

This type of connection is intended for external devices running the Android Password/PIN code
operating system.
The password for the Wi-Fi connection preset by the factory is the complete
Connection set-up vehicle identification number (entered in upper case); the PIN code for the Wi-
› Switch on the ignition. Fi direct connection is the last 6 digits of the vehicle identification number.
› In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate appli-
cation. After changing the password/PIN, the connection to SmartGate must be re-es-
› In the application, change the connection type to Wi-Fi direct. tablished on the external device to be connected using the new password or
› Then follow the instructions in the manual, which is included in the new PIN code.
SmartGate application. Changing the password for the Wi-Fi connection
The password for the connection to SmartGate _...1) includes the last six digits › Open the SmartGate web interface » page 44, SmartGate web interface.
of the vehicle identification number » page 44. › In the menu item, enter“WPA / WPA2 key:” the new password (8 to 63 alpha-
numeric characters and special characters, small and capital letters) .
With SmartGate, a maximum of two external devices can be connected simul-
taneously using Wi-Fi direct, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as re-
› Confirm the password change by tapping on the “Save” interface. 

quired.

1) The last 6 characters of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position ....

44 Using the system


› Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot” 1)
interface.
Unlocking and opening
Changing the PIN code for the Wi-Fi Direct connection
› Open the SmartGate web interface » page 44, SmartGate web interface. Unlocking and locking
› In the “WiFi Direct PIN:”menu item, enter the new PIN code (6 digits).
› Confirm the PIN code change by tapping on the “Save” interface.  Introduction
› Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot”1 ) interface. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Note With the key on the lock cylinder unlock / lock 46
If you have forgotten your password for the connection to SmartGate, Unlocking/locking with the remote control key 46
SmartGate must be reset to factory settings in a specialised workshop.
Unlocking/locking - KESSY 47
Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button 47
SafeLock 48
Individual settings 48
Opening/closing a door 48
Child safety lock 49
Malfunctions 49
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 48.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
If the doors or the luggage compartment lid remain open after the vehicle has
been locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed. 

1) If the “Reboot” interface is not displayed, you must manually restore the web browser display.

Unlocking and opening 45


WARNING Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ised persons (e.g. children) could lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition or Fig. 30
start the engine - danger of injury and accidents! Key with pop-out key bit
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!

CAUTION
■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
■ Keep the key grooves clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a nega-
 Read and observe and on page 46 first.
tive effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock. Description of the key » Fig. 30
 Unlock button
With the key on the lock cylinder unlock / lock  Lock button
 Button for unlocking/unlatching the boot lid
Fig. 29 A Button for popping out/pushing in the key bit
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
B Battery status warning light - if the warning light does not flash when you
the key for unlocking and locking
press a button on the key, the battery is discharged.
the vehicle
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
Press the  button to unlock the lid.
Hold down the  button to unlock and unlatch the lid (partially opened).
If the lid is unlocked or released with the  button, then the lid is automati-
 Read and observe and on page 46 first. cally locked after closing. The period of time after which the flap is locked can
be set » page 51.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 29
CAUTION
 Unlocking the vehicle
■ The remote control may be affected by signal superimposition by transmit-
 Locking the vehicle
ters close to the vehicle.
CAUTION ■ The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be re-

On vehicles with the KESSY system, in order to unlock/lock the vehicle using placed if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
the key via the lock cylinder, you must first remove the cap of the lock cylin- less than 3 m away » page 148.
der» page 148.

46 Using the system


Unlocking/locking - KESSY If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatical-
ly unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.

CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.

Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button

Fig. 31 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking Fig. 32


Central locking button
 Read and observe and on page 46 first.

The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
› Grip the door handle to unlock » Fig. 31 -  the vehicle.
› Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger to lock » Fig. 31 -  the
vehicle.
When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance  Read and observe and on page 46 first.
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Prerequisites for locking / unlocking with the central locking button
Information on locking
 The vehicle is not locked from the outside.
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.  None of the doors are open.

The vehicle cannot be locked if the ignition has not been turned off. › To lock, press the  button » Fig. 32.
After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by Locking is displayed in the button by the illumination of the  symbol.
touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is The following applies after locking.
locked. ▶ Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
▶ The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
If one of the doors is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which opening lever of the respective door.
the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is WARNING
automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn signal lights
will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle is au- Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
tomatically locked again. vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!

Unlocking and opening 47


SafeLock All doors
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
 Read and observe and on page 46 first.
Single door
SafeLock prevents the doors from being opened from inside as well as window The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
operation. This makes an attempted break-in to the vehicle more difficult. with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors
Activating and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
SafeLock is activated when the vehicle is locked from the outside. touched.
This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the in- Doors on a vehicle side
strument cluster after the ignition is switched off. This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the
 Check SAFELOCK! Owner's Manual! fuel filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of
 CHECK SAFELOCK both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The
other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is un-
Activation display locked or touched.
When SafeLock is activated, the warning light in the driver's door flashes for 2
seconds in rapid succession, then starts to flash at longer intervals. Automatic locking/unlocking
This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
Deactivating 15 km / h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
▶ By locking twice within 2 seconds.
▶ or: by deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
» page 50. ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
The warning light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, then
goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
Opening/closing a door
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
The SafeLock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.

WARNING
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people
must remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door
or open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult
for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!

Individual settings Fig. 33 Door handle/door opening lever

 Read and observe and on page 46 first.  Read and observe and on page 46 first.

The following functions of the central locking system can be set individually in › To open from the outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A in
the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment. the direction of the arrow » Fig. 33. 

48 Using the system


› To open from the inside, pull the door opening leverB and push the door
Malfunctions
away from you.
› To lock from the inside, grab handle C and close the door.  Read and observe and on page 46 first.
WARNING Synchronise remote
■ The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst the ve- If the buttons on the remote control key have been depressed several times
hicle is in motion - can be fatal! beyond the effective range of the equipment or the battery has been replaced
■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing in the remote control key and the vehicle cannot be unlocked with the remote
range – risk of injury! control, the key must be synchronised.
■ Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
› Press any button on the remote control key.
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
› Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Fault with the central locking
Child safety lock If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
A failure in the central locking system can lead the vehicle doors and the boot
lid can emergency lock or emergency release » page 148.
Failure of the system KESSY
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
Fig. 34 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace
the battery » page 148.
 Read and observe and on page 46 first.

The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in- Anti-theft alarm system
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
 Introduction
› To turn on the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position  » Fig. 34.
› To turn off the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Alarm trigger 50
Interior monitor and towing protection 50
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm).
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release. 

Unlocking and opening 49


CAUTION  Read and observe on page 50 first.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that all doors and windows are closed in or-
The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
der to ensure that the alarm system is fully operational.
triggers the alarm.
Note The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm.
The alarm system has its own power source, whose service life is 5 years.
Both systems should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm will
be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle inte-
Alarm trigger rior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed.
 Read and observe on page 50 first. Deactivation
The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is acti-
› Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
vated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
› Press the  button on the centre column on the driver side » Fig. 35; the 
▶ Opening the bonnet.
symbol illuminates in the button.
▶ Opening the boot lid. › Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
▶ Opening the doors. Disabling the two systems switches off SafeLock.
▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.
▶ Towing the vehicle. CAUTION
▶ Movement in the vehicle. The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in-
▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system. terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
▶ Uncoupling the trailer. glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the lock cylinder.
Luggage compartment lid
The alarm is switched off by pressing the  button on the key or switching on
the ignition.  Introduction

Interior monitor and towing protection This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening / closing the boot lid 51
Fig. 35 Delayed locking of the boot lid 51
Button for interior monitor and
WARNING
towing protection
■ Never drive with the boot lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust
gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
■ Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment
lid, it could crack – risk of injury!

50 Using the system


Opening / closing the boot lid Window operation

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Mechanical windows 52
Electric windows 52
Force limiter 53
Operational faults 53
The window can be operated mechanically by means of the handle attached to
the respective door panel.
Fig. 36 Opening / closing tailgate
Depending on equipment the windows can be operated electrically from the
 Read and observe on page 50 first. following locations; the window in the front doors or all windows from the
driver's seat and also via the buttons for the windows in the passenger door or
› To open the lid, press » Fig. 36button A in the direction of arrow 1 . the rear doors.
› Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› To close, grab the mount B and pull in the direction of arrow 3 . WARNING
■ Always close the window carefully and in a controlled manner. Otherwise
Note these could cause severe crushing injuries!
Button A » Fig. 36 is disabled when starting off or driving at a speed of over 5 ■ Power windows in the driver's door and the rear doors are equipped with
km/h. The button is reactivated when the vehicle has stopped and a door is a force limiter » page 53. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is
opened. stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. However, the
windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury!
Delayed locking of the boot lid
CAUTION
 Read and observe on page 50 first.
■ Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct func-
If the boot lid is unlocked with the button  on the key, then the boot lid is tionality of the electric windows.
automatically locked after closing. ■ Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery.

The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by Note
a specialist garage. If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle
CAUTION and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds.
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically.

Unlocking and opening 51


Mechanical windows Fig. 39
Window winder button

 Read and observe and on page 51 first.

Fig. 37 Window operation: Left / Right The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is
switched on.
 Read and observe and on page 51 first.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the front windows - variant 1 or
› To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 37. the front and rear windows - variant 2 will be operated by pressing/pulling the
› To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow B. buttons in the driver´s door» Fig. 38.
The window in the front passenger door and the windows in the rear doors
Electric windows (variant 2) are operated via the button in each door.
Electric window buttons » Fig. 38
A Left front door
B Right front door
C Left rear door
D Right rear door
E Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats)
› To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win-
dow has moved into the desired position.
Fig. 38 Buttons for window-openers: Version 1/version 2 › To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold
until the window has moved into the desired position.
The driver's window can be automatically opened & closed fully by pushing or
pulling the button up to the stop. Renewed pushing/pulling of the button cau-
ses the window to stop immediately.
› To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press theE button.
When the buttons are disabled in the rear doors, the warning light  in the
button E illuminates.

52 Using the system


Force limiter Lights and visibility
 Read and observe and on page 51 first.
Lights
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.  Introduction
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec- This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down Operating the light function 54
by several centimetres.
Daytime running lights(DAY LIGHT) 54
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be- Turn signal/main beam 55
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet Automatic driving light control 55
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not Fog lights/rear fog light 56
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
Fog lights with the CORNER function 56
on.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 56
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window Hazard warning light system 57
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force! Parking light 57
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again. Driving abroad 57

WARNING Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched on.
The front passenger window with the electric window has no force limiter. The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of injury! that shown in this layout» Fig. 40 on page 54.

WARNING
Operational faults The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and
 Read and observe and on page 51 first. does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the lights and, if
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the prevailing light condi-
Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mecha- tions.
nism to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate
the window again as soon as the operating mechanism has cooled down. Note
The electric windows are deactivated after the vehicle battery has been dis- The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is on, the light-emit-
connected After connecting the vehicle battery, the system is activated as fol- ting surface demists after a short time.
lows.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
› Release the button.
› Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.

Lights and visibility 53


Operating the light function Note
■ If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
Fig. 40 automatically switch off 1) and the parking lights illuminate. The parking lights
Light switch and control dial for are switched off when the ignition key is removed (for vehicles with the KESSY
headlight range adjustment system, after opening the driver's door).
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.

Daytime running lights(DAY LIGHT)


 Read and observe on page 53 first.

The daytime running light (hereinafter referred to as "function") lights the


 Read and observe on page 53 first. front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
To switch on/off the lights, turn the A » Fig. 40 switch to one of the following
positions (equipment-dependent).  The light switch is in the position  or .
 Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)  The ignition is switched on.
 Switching lights on/off automatically » page 55  The function is activated.
 Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 57 Activating/deactivating function on vehicles with Infotainment
 Switch on low beam This function can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s
Manual - Infotainment.
To adjust the headlight range control, turn dial B » Fig. 40 in line with the
vehicle load » . Deactivating on vehicles without Infotainment
 Front seats occupied, boot empty › With the ignition switched off, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards
 All seats occupied, boot empty the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position.
 All seats occupied, boot loaded
› Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audi-
ble signal (about 3 s) can be heard.
 Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
Activating on vehicles without Infotainment
WARNING › With the ignition switched off, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions - other- the steering wheel, push up and hold in this position.
wise risk of accident. › Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audi-
■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi- ble signal (about 3 s) can be heard.
cles.
■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
WARNING
Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor.

1) Does not apply to the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME function
» page 56.

54 Using the system


Turn signal/main beam Automatic driving light control

Fig. 41 Fig. 42
Operating lever: Turn signal and Light switch: AUTO position
main beam operation

 Read and observe on page 53 first.  Read and observe on page 53 first.

Control stalk positions » Fig. 41 The light switch is in position » Fig. 42 then depending on the equipment
 Switch on right turn signal the automatic switch on / off the lights corresponding to the light or weather
 Switch on left turn signal conditions (rain) takes place.
 Switch on main beam If the light switch is in position , the lettering  illuminates next to the
 Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol  also illumi-
position) nates next to the light switch.

The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on. Automatic driving light control in the rain (referred to as function in the
following)
The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off. The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions
The turn signal switches off automatically, depending on the steering angle are met.
after completing the turn.  The function is activated.
Comfort signalling  The light switch is in the position .
When the operating lever is pressed lightly up or down, the indicator in ques-  The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
tion flashes three times. The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
If, during the comfort signalling, the control stalk is pressed in the opposite di- Setting, activation/deactivation
rection, the indicating will stop. The following functions can be set or activated/deactivated in Infotainment
The comfort signalling can be activated/deactivated » Owner´s Manual - Info- » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
tainment. ▶ Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions
for automatic driving light control
WARNING ▶ Automatic driving light control during rain
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled. CAUTION
Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor -
this can disrupt the function of the system.

Lights and visibility 55


Fog lights/rear fog light Fog lights with the CORNER function
 Read and observe on page 53 first.
Fig. 43
Light switch – switch on front The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
and rear fog light tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering), if the following conditions are ful-
filled.
 The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply 1).
 The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
 The low beam is switched on.
 The fog lights are not switched on.
 Read and observe on page 53 first. The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.

Switching on the fog lights / rear fog lights is possible if the following condi- COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
tions apply.
 The light switch is in position ,  or  » Fig. 43.  Read and observe on page 53 first.

› To switch on the fog lights, turn the light switch to position 1 ; the warning The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
light  illuminates in the instrument cluster. nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
› To switch on the rear fog light, pull the light switch to position 2 , the indi- The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
cator light  will light up in the instrument cluster.
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
pulling out the light switch to the only possible setting.
switch is in the position .
The fog lights/rear fog light are switched off in the reverse order.
The two functions can be activated/deactivated and set in Infotainment
Note » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
While driving with an accessory connected to the trailer socket (e.g. trailer,
CAUTION
bike carrier) only the equipment is illuminated by the fog light. The towing de-
vice must be installed at the factory or from the ŠKODA original accessories. ■ Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in
the holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor -
this can disrupt the function of the system.
■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.

1) If the two switch-on variants are conflicting (e.g. if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right
turn signal light is switched on), the turn signal light has the higher priority.

56 Using the system


Hazard warning light system Switching on the side light on both sides 
› Switch on the ignition and turn the light switch into the position
» page 54, the parking lights are turned on.
Fig. 44 › Switch off the ignition and lock the vehicle.
Button for hazard warning light
system After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au-
dible warning is turned off.
CAUTION
■ Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
■ The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
 Read and observe on page 53 first. parking lights will not switch on automatically.
› To switch on/off, press the  button» Fig. 44. Driving abroad
When first switched on, the turn signal lights and the warning light  buttons
all flash at the same time as the warning lights   in the instrument cluster.  Read and observe on page 53 first.

The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switch- When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
ed off. left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, it is neces-
sary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
Interior lighting
When the hazard warning system is on and the indicator light is switched on
(e.g. when turning), the hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and
only the turn signal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle1).
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Parking light Front interior light 58
 Read and observe on page 53 first. LED front interior lights 58
Interior lighting, rear 58
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
Switching on the side light  on one side switched off, the lights will automatically switch off after approximately after
› Switch off the ignition. 10 minutes.
› Press the lever all the way into position  or  until it stops» Fig. 41 on
page 55.
The parking light is turned on on the relevant side of the vehicle.

1) Valid only when comfort signalling is activated » page 55.

Lights and visibility 57


Front interior light The lighting is switched on automatically after opening the door; switching off
occurs automatically after the locking of the vehicle or 30 seconds after clos-
ing the door.
The brightness level of lighting with the dipped beam or parking lights switch-
ed on can be adjusted in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.

Interior lighting, rear

Fig. 46
Interior lights at the rear

Fig. 45 Operation of the front light: Version 1/version 2

Positions of the sliding light switch A » Fig. 45


 Switching on
 Switching off
 Automatic operation
Operation (by pressing the switch) » Fig. 46
Switch on / off (by pressing the relevant switch B ) » Fig. 45
A  Power on / off
 Reading lamp left
 Reading lamp right The rear light is operated automatically together with the front light1).
▶ When the front interior lighting is switched on, the rear interior lighting also
Automatic operation - position  turns on automatically.
The system is turned on when any of the following is present. ▶ When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior lighting can
▶ The vehicle is unlocked. be turned on/off as required.
▶ One of the doors is opened.
▶ The ignition key is removed.
Visibility
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
▶ The vehicle is locked.  Introduction
▶ The ignition is switched on.
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen and rear window 59
LED front interior lights Sun visors front 59 
The ambient lighting illuminates the storage compartments in the centre con-
sole, in the doors and the footwell.

1) This function only applies to certain countries. In some countries, the light at the rear is controlled inde-
pendently from the light at the front.

58 Using the system


WARNING Sun visors front
No objects should be attached to the sun visor that could restrict the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or in a collision.

Windscreen and rear window

Fig. 47
Buttons for the windscreen and
rear window heating

Fig. 48 Fold down the cover / swivel cover to the door and slide the mir-
ror cover

 Read and observe on page 59 first.


 Read and observe on page 59 first. Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 48
1 Swivel cover towards the windscreen
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the windscreen / rear win-
dow. 2 Swivel cover towards the door
A Make-up mirror with cover
The heating only works when the engine is running.
B Slide mirror cover
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 47
 Switching the windscreen heater on/off
Windscreen wipers and washers
 Switch on/off the rear window heating
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.  Introduction
The heating automatically switches off after ten minutes. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front windscreen wipers and washers 60
Note
Rear windscreen wipers and washers/ reversing camera cleaning system 60
■ If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
Headlight cleaning system 61
» page 131, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge
protection. The windshield wipers and the windshield washer system only operate if the
■ If the light is flashing inside the button, there is no heating because the bat- ignition is switched on.
tery charge is too low.
WARNING
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front. 

Lights and visibility 59


CAUTION A  Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position  - by setting the
■ If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them often
off the windscreen » page 150.  Spraying and wiping the disc (spring-loaded position) - after releasing the
■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the operating lever the wipers continue for another 1 to 3 strokes
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain can be activated/deactivated in In-
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
fotainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.
■ Carefully separate frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen and WARNING
free from snow and ice.
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is not released
■ Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is a risk of damage to the
from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers man-
windscreen by the windscreen wiper arms.
ually depending on the visibility conditions.
■ Do not switch on the ignition when the wiper arm is raised from the wind-
screen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet by the wiper arms.
Rear windscreen wipers and washers/ reversing camera cleaning
Note system
Depending on vehicle equipment, the windscreen washer jets can be heated
automatically after starting the engine.
Fig. 50
Operating the windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers and washers and washing system

Fig. 49
Operating the front windscreen
wipers and washer system

 Read and observe and on page 59 first.

The lever can be moved to the following positions » Fig. 50


 Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the
 Read and observe and on page 59 first. control stalk, the wipers perform another 1 to 3 wiper strokes
Spraying the rear view camera (sprung position)
The lever can be moved to the following positions » Fig. 49  Rear screen wiping
 High-speed wiping  Wipers and washers off
 Slow-speed wiping
 Depending on equipment fitted: Automatic rear wiper
▶ Intermittent wiping If, with the front wipers switched on, reverse gear is selected, the automatic
▶ Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain regular intermittent wiping of the rear window is enabled.
 Wipers and washers off Depending on the equipment, this function can be enabled/disabled in Info-
 Single wipe of the windscreen (spring-loaded position) tainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment or at a specialist garage.

60 Using the system


Headlight cleaning system  Read and observe on page 61 first.

 Read and observe and on page 59 first. Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 51 - 
1 Basic mirror position (not darkened)
The headlights are cleaned with every first and after every tenth spraying of 2 Mirror blackout
the windscreen under the following conditions.
 The ignition is switched on. Mirror with automatic dimming
The mirror dimming » Fig. 51 -  is automatically controlled after the engine
 The low beam is switched on.
start.
 The outside temperature is between -11° C to +36° C.
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).
WARNING
Rear view mirror ■ Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external de-
 Introduction vice can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - it could cause an acci-
dent.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
Interior mirror dimming 61 on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The
Exterior mirrors 62 sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror.

WARNING WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, they make objects ap- ■ The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
pear smaller and further away. Therefore, use the interior mirror whenever leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respi-
possible, for assessing the distances to the vehicles following behind. ratory system.
■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
Interior mirror dimming ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. If
necessary get medical assistance.

Fig. 51 Interior mirror: manual dimming/auto-darkening

Lights and visibility 61


Exterior mirrors Seats and head restraints
Front seats

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting the front seats 62
Setting the armrest height 63
WARNING
■ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – otherwise
Fig. 52 Exterior mirror operation: mechanical / electrical risk of accident!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
 Read and observe on page 61 first.
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
The outer mirror surfaces are (depending on the vehicle specification) mechan-
ically or electrically adjustable. Adjusting the front seats
› To set the mirror surface, move the knob in the direction of arrows » Fig. 52.
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by Fig. 53
hand by carefully pressing on the edge of the mirror surface. Control elements on the seat

The knob for the electrically adjustable mirrors can be moved to the following
positions » Fig. 52 - .
 Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror
 Switch off mirror control
 Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror
 Exterior mirror heater (only operates when the engine is running)
 Read and observe on page 62 first.
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window. To put it back The seats can be adjusted by the pulling or pressing the operating element in
into its original position, it should be folded back from the side window until it the direction of the arrows» Fig. 53.
audibly clicks into place. A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control
lever must lock audibly)
WARNING
B Adjusting height of seat
Do not toucsh the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning. C Adjust the tilt of the backrest (when adjusting the backrest take off any
pressure, and select the required tilt using your back)
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.

62 Using the system


Setting the armrest height Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adapt the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests.
Fig. 54 Folding forward
Raise armrest › Push the head rest into the seat backrest until it clicks into position.
› Insert the belt buckle latching element C of the seat belt into the opening in
the side panel - ready position » Fig. 55.
› Push the release lever B in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the seat
backrest in the direction of arrow 2 .
In the undivided back seat, insert the buckle tongues C into the two outer
belts and the press the release handles A on both sides of the seat back si-
multaneously.
 Read and observe on page 62 first.
Folding backwards
› To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow into one of › Pull the outer seat belt to the side panel in the direction of arrow 3
the six locking positions » Fig. 54. » Fig. 55.
› To fold down, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow up to the stop and › Raise the seat backrest against the direction of arrow 2 until the release
then fold back down again. handle A audibly locks. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest.
› Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.
Rear seats In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. After
folding back the seat back, the release handles A should audibly click into
 Introduction place on both sides of the seat back and the red mark B should not be visible
on either side of the seat back.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
WARNING
Seat backrests 63
■ The seat backs in occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
Fold down armrest 64
■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
Seat backrests transported on the other rear seats.
■ The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on
sudden braking – risk of injury.

CAUTION
When moving the seat backrest, the seat belts should not be trapped - there is
a risk of damage to the seat belts.

Fig. 55 Fold seat backrest forwards / standby position of the seat belt

Seats and head restraints 63


Fold down armrest Adjustment of the head rest heights is the same in the front and rear.
› Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 57.
Fig. 56 › To move the headrest down, press the securing button A in the direction of
Fold down armrest arrow 2 and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of ar-
row 3 .

Removing/inserting the front headrests

The armrest can be folded down by pulling on the loop A in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 56.

Headrests

 Introduction
Fig. 58 Removing/inserting the front headrest
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Setting the height 64 › To remove, hold the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 and re-
Removing/inserting the front headrests 64 move the headrest in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 58.
Removing/inserting the rear headrests 64 › To insert, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow
3 until the locking button clicks into place.
Note
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can- Removing/inserting the rear headrests
not be adjusted in height.

Setting the height

Fig. 59 Removing/inserting the rear headrest 

Fig. 57 Setting the height of the headrest

64 Using the system


› To remove, hold the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 , at the CAUTION
same time, using a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm, press the The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
locking button in the opening B in the direction of arrow 2 and pull out the ■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
rest in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 59. ■ Do not switch on the heating for unoccupied seats.
› To insert, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow ■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have objects on them (e.g. a
4 until the locking button clicks into place. child seat, bag or similar).
■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have seat covers or protective
Seat heaters covers on them.

Note
■ If the heaters for the rear seats are set to their highest intensity (level 2),
they are automatically switched down to level 1 after 10 minutes.
■ If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automati-
cally » page 131, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery dis-
charge protection.

Fig. 60 Buttons for heating the front seats/rear seats

The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats
can be heated electrically.
Seat heating buttons » Fig. 60
 Left seat heating
 Right seat heating
› To turn on the heater at maximum heat (level 2), press button  or .
By repeatedly pressing the button, the heat is turned down until it is com-
pletely switched off. The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number
of illuminated warning lights in the switch.
The seat heating only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
If you are sensitive to pain and/or temperature, e.g. through medication,
paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to
use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to make
regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the
body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your
doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.

Seats and head restraints 65


WARNING (Continued)
Useful features
■ For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments should be closed
Interior fittings while driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened lid or through the
loose objects in the compartment.
 Introduction ■ Make sure no objects protrude from the storage compartments - danger
of injury!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Do not exceed the permissible loads for the storage compartments and

Ticket holder 66 pockets - risk of injury and risk of damage to the compartments and pock-
stowage compartments in the doors 67 ets!
■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like should only be stored in the ashtray -
Storage compartment in the centre console 67
danger of fire/burns!
USB and AUX input 67 ■ The storage compartments, multimedia holder and waste container are
Storage compartment on the dashboard 67 not a substitute for the ashtray and must not be used for such purposes –
Cup holders 68 risk of fire!
Waste container 68
Cigarette lighter 69 CAUTION
Ashtray 69 Do not place any large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and pock-
12-volt socket 70 ets - there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
Multimedia holder 70
Storage compartment in the front arm rest 71 Ticket holder
Glasses compartment 71
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 71 Fig. 61
Storage compartment for umbrella 72 Ticket holder
Clothes hook 72
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats 72
Storage pockets on the inner sides of the front seats 72
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic –
risk of accident!  Read and observe and on page 66 first.
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
they could cause an accident! The ticket holder» Fig. 61 is provided for the holding and displaying e.g. car
■ Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat, except objects de- park tickets.
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.

66 Using the system


stowage compartments in the doors  Read and observe and on page 66 first.

The non-lockable storage compartment is located in the front centre console


A and in the rear centre console B » Fig. 63.

USB and AUX input

Fig. 64
USB and AUX inputs

Fig. 62 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door

 Read and observe and on page 66 first.

Storage compartments » Fig. 62


A Storage compartment  Read and observe and on page 66 first.
B Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l The USB input (identified with ) and AUX input (identified with ) are loca-
C Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l ted above the storage compartment in the front centre console » Fig. 64.
WARNING Information on use » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment.
The storage compartment A » Fig. 62 is to be used exclusively for storing
objects which do not stick out - danger of restricting the effectiveness of Storage compartment on the dashboard
the side airbags.
Fig. 65
Storage compartment
Storage compartment in the centre console

 Read and observe and on page 66 first.

The storage compartment is located in the middle part of the dashboard


» Fig. 65.
Fig. 63 Non-lockable compartment, front / rear

Useful features 67
Cup holders Waste container

Fig. 66 Cup holder at the front/rear Fig. 68 Inserting and moving/opening

Fig. 67
Cup holder in rear armrest

 Read and observe and on page 66 first. Fig. 69 Replacing bags

Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.  Read and observe and on page 66 first.
The cup holders are located in the front centre console A , rear B » Fig. 66
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
and in the rear armrest C » Fig. 67.
Insert waste container
WARNING
› Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. › Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow A
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. » Fig. 68.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
› Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow B .
they may spill – risk of scalding!
Remove the waste container
CAUTION › Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow A
» Fig. 68.
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the Open/close waste container
electrical components or seat upholstery. › Lift the lid in the direction of arrow C » Fig. 68. 

68 Using the system


Closing takes place in reverse order. Note
Replace bags The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
› Remove the waste container from the slot.
› Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 69. Ashtray
› Pull the bag together with the frame down in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the bag from the frame.
› Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow 3 .
› Place the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow 4 into the container
body, so that the two lugs engage audibly on the frame.
Note
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.

Cigarette lighter
Fig. 71 Remove front/rear ashtray and open
Fig. 70  Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Cigarette lighter
The ashtray can be used for disposing of ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like.
› Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow A » Fig. 71.
› To openturn the ashtray cover in the direction of the arrow B .
Closing takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
 Read and observe and on page 66 first.

› To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing
lighter clicks out again » Fig. 70.
› Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the sock-
et.
WARNING
■ The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burning, fire
or damage to the vehicle interior.
■ Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - can cause burns.

Useful features 69
12-volt socket CAUTION
■ The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts - otherwise the
electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
■ Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.

Multimedia holder
Fig. 72 12-volt socket cover: in the front centre console / in the luggage
Fig. 73
compartment
Multimedia holder
 Read and observe and on page 66 first.

› To use, remove the cover of the socket » Fig. 72 -  or open the cover of the
socket » Fig. 72 - .
› Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic –
 Read and observe and on page 66 first.
risk of accident! Multimedia holder » Fig. 73
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
A Storage compartment for storing two coins
they could cause an accident!
■ Stow all devices safely during the journey to prevent them from being
B Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or C Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
an accident – risk of death!
■ The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire!
■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
■ The socket also works if the ignition is switched off. When leaving the ve-
hicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.

70 Using the system


Storage compartment in the front arm rest CAUTION
■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.

Storage compartment on the front passenger side

Fig. 74 Storage compartment / open storage compartment

 Read and observe and on page 66 first.

› To open, hold the armrest in the area A and lift the lid of the storage com-
partment in the direction of arrow » Fig. 74.
› To close, swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly Fig. 76 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and
clicks into place. open air supply

Glasses compartment  Read and observe and on page 66 first.

Fig. 75 The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated
Opening the glasses storage box when the storage compartment is opened), a bottle holder which can take
contents of max. 1 l as well as an air outlet.
Storage compartment
› To open, pull the handle A in direction of arrow 1 and fold up the cover in
direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 76.
› To close, swivel the cover in the direction of arrow 3 until it audibly clicks
into place.
Air supply
 Read and observe and on page 66 first. › To open, turn the dial in the direction of arrow B until it stops » Fig. 76.
› To open, press on the lid of the glasses compartment in area A . The com-
› To close, turn the dial against the direction of arrow B until it stops.
partment folds in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 75. The temperature of the storage compartment supplied with air is dependent
› To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it on the setting in the air conditioning.
audibly clicks into place.
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g.

Useful features 71
Storage compartment for umbrella WARNING
■ Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
Fig. 77 of clothing hung up - danger of injury.
■ Do not use hangers to hang up the clothes - there is a risk of restricting
Storage compartment for um-
brella the effectiveness of head airbags and a danger of injury from the hanger.
■ Make sure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impede your
vision.

Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats

Fig. 79
 Read and observe and on page 66 first. Map pockets
The storage compartment under the front passenger seat » Fig. 77 is used for
storing an umbrella.
CAUTION
Never store a wet umbrella in the storage compartment - there is a risk of
damage to the umbrella.

Note  Read and observe and on page 66 first.


We recommend that you use the umbrella from the ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries. The storage pockets » Fig. 79 are intended for the storage of maps, maga-
zines, etc.
Clothes hook
Storage pockets on the inner sides of the front seats
Fig. 78
Clothes hooks Fig. 80
Storage pocket

 Read and observe and on page 66 first.


 Read and observe and on page 66 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 78. The storage pockets are located on the inside of the front seats » Fig. 80 and
are used to store small and light objects (e.g. mobile phones). 
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.

72 Using the system


The maximum permissible load of each of the pockets is 150 g.

Tablet holder

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Install / remove 73
Handle holder 73
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone, etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and Fig. 82 Removing: Holder / Adapter
max. 195 mm can be secured in the support.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.  Read and observe on page 73 first.

CAUTION › To insert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of and clip in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 81 » .
damage or functional impairment. › Clip the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter.
› To remove, pull on the securing tab A in direction of arrow 3 and take the
holder in direction of arrow 4 out of the adapter » Fig. 82.
Install / remove
› Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow 5 from the guide
rods of the headrest.
WARNING
Carefully clip in the adapter - there is a risk of injuring your finger.

Handle holder

Fig. 81 Installing: Adapter / Holder

Fig. 83 Tilt and rotate holder 

Useful features 73
Fig. 84 Transport of cargo
Adjust holder size
Luggage compartment and transporting objects

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fastening elements 75
Fixing nets 75
Multifunction pocket 76
 Read and observe on page 73 first.
Hooks 76
The holder may be tipped by 30° in the direction of the arrow 1 and turned by Luggage compartment cover 76
360° in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 83. “Parking position” of the boot cover 77
Storage compartment in the boot 77
› To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A in the direction of ar-
row 3 and push the part B in the direction of arrow 4 to the desired posi- Cargo elements 78
tion » Fig. 84. Floor covering on both sides 78
Class N1 vehicles 78
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to the
shift in centre-of-gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted ac-
cordingly.
When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to
▶ Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or fixing nets so that they cannot
slip.
▶ Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
▶ Tyre pressure is to match the load.

In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will go out auto-
matically after 10 minutes. 

74 Using the system


WARNING Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 85
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners, A Lashing eyes for securing cargo, fastening nets and multifunction pocket
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – risk of injury! B Fastener for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
■ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of C Lashing eye for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
the vehicle – risk of accident!
■ An unsecured dirt or improperly attached load could slip during a sudden The upper front lashing eye C is located behind the folding rear seat backrest.
manoeuvre or in an accident - danger of injury! The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes is A is 350 kg.
■ Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death! Fixing nets
■ When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats .

CAUTION
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged.
■ Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of abrasive objects.
■ Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the lug-
gage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the com-
partments. Fig. 86 Fastening examples for nets
■ Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
Fig. 87
Fastening vertical pocket
Fastening elements

Fig. 85
Fasteners

 Read and observe and on page 75 first.

Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 86 and » Fig. 87


A Horizontal pocket
 Read and observe and on page 75 first.
B Floor net
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment. C Vertical pocket
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.

Transport of cargo 75
Multifunction pocket Luggage compartment cover

Fig. 88
Securing the multifunction pock-
et

 Read and observe and on page 75 first. Fig. 90 Remove the luggage compartment cover

The pocket » Fig. 88can be secured to the fastening elements A , B and C  Read and observe and on page 75 first.
» Fig. 85 on page 75.
If the support straps A » Fig. 90 are attached to the boot lid, then opening
The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to the fastening element
the lid will raise the boot lid cover (hereafter referred to as cover).
is 3 kg.
The cover can be taken out of the vehicle or stowed behind the rear seat
Hooks backs in the so-called “Park position”» Fig. 91 on page 77.
The maximum permissible load of the cover is 1 kg.
Fig. 89
Removing
Hooks
› On both sides of the boot lid unhook the straps A in direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 90.
› Hold the raised cover and press on the two sides on the underside of the
cover in the area of the bolt C .
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Installing
› Position the fixtures B on the cover over the bolts C » Fig. 90.
 Read and observe and on page 75 first. › Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the
studs C . The fixture B must lock into place of the studs C on both sides of
One hook for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., is provided the luggage compartment.
on each side of the luggage compartment » Fig. 89. › Unhook the straps A on both sides of the boot lid.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg. WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - risk of injury if brak-
ing suddenly or colliding! 

76 Using the system


CAUTION Storage compartment in the boot
■Observe the following instructions to avoid canting and the subsequent
damage to the cover or the side trim.
■ The cover must be inserted properly and the load must not exceed the
height of the cover.
■ The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com-
partment lid when it is in the raised position.
■ There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position
and the rear backrest.

“Parking position” of the boot cover


Fig. 92 Remove the tray cover on the left / right
Fig. 91
Luggage compartment cover  Read and observe and on page 75 first.
stowed behind the rear seats
The storage compartments with removable covers are designed for storing
small objects of up to 1.5 kg. in weight in total.
› To remove, hold the top part of the cover and remove it in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 92.
CAUTION
 Read and observe and on page 75 first. When handling the storage compartment cover, ensure that it and/or the lug-
gage compartment trim is not damaged.
The luggage compartment cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
› Slide the dismantled cover between the rear seat backrest and the bolt A
» Fig. 91.
WARNING
The luggage compartment cover in the “parking position” restricts the driv-
er's view at the back.

Transport of cargo 77
Cargo elements Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.

Transportation on the roof rack

Fig. 93 Removing cargo elements / example on how to mount the load by


means of the cargo element

 Read and observe and on page 75 first.

The cargo elements are designed for mounting and securing loads with a max- Fig. 94 Attachment points
imum gross weight of 8 kg.
The attachment points A and B are located on both sides of the vehicle
› To use, remove the cargo elements in the direction of the arrows » Fig. 93 - » Fig. 94.
.
› Use the cargo elements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear The mounting and dismounting of the basic carrier is carried out according to
seats » Fig. 93 . the instructions provided.
› After use, secure the cargoelements in their original position. Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 75 kg.
Floor covering on both sides
WARNING
 Read and observe and on page 75 first.
The following instructions must be observed to aid road safety when trans-
You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment. One porting cargo on the roof rack.
side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet ■ Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly
or dirty items). with suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
Class N1 vehicles the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
 Read and observe and on page 75 first. therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstance – risk of acci-
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the dent! 
load.

78 Using the system


CAUTION
Heating and ventilation
■ Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported. Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
Note
 Introduction
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Heating and manual air conditioning 80
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) 80
Climatronic - automatic operation 81
Air distribution control 81
Air outlet vents 82
The heater heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning sys-
tem also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system works under the following conditions.
 The cooling system is switched on.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above 2 °C.
 The blower is switched on.
When the cooling system is switched on, it prevents misting of the windscreen
and windows.
It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly acti-
vating the air recirculation system» page 81.
Health protection
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
▶ The difference between the outside temperature and the inside temperature
should not be greater than 5 °C.
▶ The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
▶ Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner is to be carried out by a spe-
cialist company. 

Heating and ventilation 79


WARNING  Air flow in the footwell
■ The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.  Air flow to the windows and the footwell
Otherwise there is a risk of accident.  Switch recirculation on/off » page 81
■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow  Switch the cooling system on/off
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
Information on the cooling system
After pressing the button  » Fig. 95 the warning light on the button lights
Note up, even if not all the conditions for the cooling system have been met. The
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or cooling system starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly. met » page 79.
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a Note
leak! To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air condi-
■ If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to tioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circum-
ensure that the engine cools down. stances.

Heating and manual air conditioning Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)

Fig. 95 Controls of the heating / air conditioning Fig. 96 Controls the Climatronic

 Read and observe on page 80 first.  Read and observe on page 80 first.

Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding button » Fig. 95. When the function is activated, a warning the corresponding button » Fig. 96.
light illuminates in the button. 1 Setting temperature
▶  Reduce the temperature / Increase the temperature
A Setting temperature
▶  Reduce the temperature / Increase the temperature 2 Selected temperature
B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Fan off, level 4: high-speed) 3 Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 82 4 Automatic operation of the air conditioning system is switched on
 Air flow to the windows 5 Intensive air flow to the windscreen switched on
 Air flow to the upper body 6 Direction of air flow 

80 Using the system


7 Recirculated air mode activated Note
8 Cooling system activated In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in en-
9 Set blower speed gine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
10 Set the blower speed (the set blower speed is indicated by the corre-
sponding number of segments in the display) Climatronic - automatic operation
▶ Turn to the left: Decrease speed / switch off Climatronic
▶ Turn to the right: Increase speed  Read and observe on page 80 first.
11 Interior temperature sensor The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
 Switching on/off the intensive windscreen air flow - when this function to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
is switched on, the warning light illuminates in the button
› To switch on press the  button. The display shows  (pos. 4 » Fig. 96
 Switching automatic mode on » page 81 on page 80).
 Switching the airflow to the windows on and off › To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
 Switching the airflow to the upper body on and off speed. The temperature regulation is continued.
 Switching the airflow to the footwell on and off
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 81 Air distribution control
 Switch the cooling system on/off  Read and observe on page 80 first.
When this function is switched on, the corresponding icon appears in the dis-
play. The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the In-
terior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation function remains the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
active, whereby the lowest temperature that can be reached is the outside
temperature.
› To switch on/off, press the button.
Heating and manual air conditioning system
Setting temperature
If the air distribution control is set to position  when the recirculation modes
In the range between 16 ° C and 29 ° C, an automatic temperature control
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. By pressing the 
takes place.
button, the air recirculation also in this position can be switched on again.
At a temperature setting below 16 ° C,  lights up in the display, the Climatron-
ic functions with maximum cooling performance. Climatronic
With the recirculated-air mode switched on the symbol  appears in the dis-
At a temperature setting above 29 ° C,  lights up in the temperature display, play.
the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
The symbol  disappears from the display after turning off the air recircula-
Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit tion.
Press the  button and  simultaneously and hold for about 2 s, the dis-
If the humidity increases in the vehicle, an automatic shutdown of the recircu-
play shows the desired unit (position 3 » Fig. 96).
lation can occur. 

CAUTION
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor 11 » Fig. 96 - the function of the
Climatronic could be affected.

Heating and ventilation 81


WARNING The setting of the airflow direction is carried out by moving the adjustment el-
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time, ement A » Fig. 97 in the desired direction.
because no fresh air is fed through from the outside. “Stale air” may result Open/close
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also › Turn the regulator B up/down» Fig. 97.
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as windows mist up, turn on the re-
circulation system immediately - risk of accident! Depending on the setting for air distribution, the air will flow from the follow-
ing air vents.
CAUTION Set the direction of the air
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air operation Air outlet nozzles » Fig. 97
outlet
is switched on. The smoke sucked from the interior is deposited on the evapo-
 1. 2. 4
rator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the air
conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through consid-  1. 2. 4. 5
erable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).  3. 4
 4. 5
Note
If recirculated air mode is switched on for around 15 minutes, the  symbol CAUTION
will begin to flash in the Climatronic display as a sign that the recirculated air Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
mode is switched on long-term. If the recirculated air mode is not switched off,
the  symbol flashes for around 5 minutes.

Air outlet vents

Fig. 97 Air outlet vents

 Read and observe on page 80 first.

The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4 » Fig. 97,
the outlets can be opened and closed individually.

82 Using the system


Note
Driving
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. This helps the engine to reach
Starting-off and Driving its operating temperature faster.
Starting and stopping the engine
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
 Introduction  Read and observe and on page 83 first.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock 83 theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult.
Switch on/off ignition 84
Immobiliser
Starting / stopping the engine 84
The immobiliser allows the engine to start provided an original vehicle key only
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button 85 is used.
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and Malfunction of the immobiliser
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button. If a component in the immobiliser key fails, it is not possible to start the en-
gine. A corresponding message appears in the display of the instrument clus-
WARNING
ter to explain the immobiliser is active.
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent! To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
■ While driving with the engine stopped the ignition must always be
Steering lock - lock
switched on. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident!
■ Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
› On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
has come to a stop » page 88, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock -
danger of an accident!
› On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driv-
er's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off after-
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
wards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
risk of theft etc! locked.
■ Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in an enclosed place - there is the
danger of poisoning and death! Steering lock - unlock
› On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
CAUTION ignition. If this is not possible, then move the steering wheel slightly back
and forth, as a result of which the steering lock should unlock.
■ Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage! › On vehicles with starter button, get into the vehicle and close the driver's
■ Do not push-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic
door. Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only
when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid.
■ On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is loca- WARNING
ted. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - risk of accident!
left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key!

Starting-off and Driving 83


Switch on/off ignition Starting the engine
› On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position 3 and the engine
starts» Fig. 98 on page 84 . Then release the key, the engine will start au-
tomatically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Re-
peat the start-up process after 30 s.
› On vehicles with starter button, press the button briefly » Fig. 98 on page 84
- , the motor will start automatically.
For vehicles with diesel engines the glow plug warning light  goes on during
starting. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes out.

Fig. 98 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button Switching the engine off
› Stop the vehicle.
 Read and observe and on page 83 first. › On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position 1 » Fig. 98 on
page 84 .
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 98 -  › On vehicles with starter button, press the button » Fig. 98 on page 84 - ,
1 Ignition switched off, engine switched off the engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
2 Ignition switched on For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
3 Starting engine if the selector lever is in position P.
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey if the en-
› Press the » Fig. 98 -  button, the ignition is turned on / off. gine has been working at high revs over a prolonged period, but leave it to run
at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation
On vehicles with manual transmission, the pedal must not be depressed to
of heat when the engine is switched off.
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de- Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
Starting / stopping the engine › Keep the knob pressed » Fig. 98 on page 84 -  or press it twice within 1
second.
 Read and observe and on page 83 first.
After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
Before starting the engine locked.
› Firmly apply the handbrake. CAUTION
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts. When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position ing a vehicle with automatic transmission must always be in P mode. 

P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.

84 Driving
Note The START STOPsystem (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces
■ The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start- CO2emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel.
ing the cold engine. If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heat- (e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it again when mov-
ing period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily. ing off.
■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may (also intermittently)
continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes. The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the
driver, the others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified.
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button Therefore the system may react differently in situations which seem identi-
cal from the driver's perspective.
Fig. 99 The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
Starting the engine - Press the (even where this has previously been manually deactivated with the button ).
button with the key
Note
If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains on.

Operation

Fig. 100
 Read and observe and on page 83 first. Display

If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a system
fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
› Press the starter button with the key » Fig. 99.
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required.
CAUTION Vehicles with manual transmission
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
out of charge or the signal fails (strong electromagnetic field) or is shielded halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released.
(e.g. in an aluminium case). The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.

START-STOPsystem Vehicles with automatic transmission


The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a halt
 Introduction and the brake pedal is operated.
The engine is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released. 
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation 85
Manually deactivating/activating the system 86

Starting-off and Driving 85


Requirements for the system to function correctly Note
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly. ■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
 The driver's door is closed. door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will
 The driver has fastened the seat belt. have to be restarted manually.
 The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop. ■ No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic

 No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket. transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
System status takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt ■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
» Fig. 100. down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
 The engine is automatically switched off; when the vehicle moves off the angle.
ignition process will be automatically initiated.
 The engine is not automatically switched off. Manually deactivating/activating the system
The engine does not shut down when the vehicle stops, if e.g. the following
applies. Fig. 101
▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet Button for the START-STOP sys-
been reached. tem
▶ The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
▶ The current consumption is too high.
▶ High air conditioning or heating output (high fan speed, big difference be-
tween the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine has shut down automatically but the system detects that the en-
gine is required to run (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly) then the
system automatically starts up the engine. › To deactivate/activate the system, press the button  » Fig. 101.
More information about the current system status can be displayed on the In- When the system is deactivated, the symbol  in the button lights up.
fotainment screen » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment. If the system is turned off, it will be automatically reactivated after turning the
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of ignition off and on.
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage. Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.

Brakes and parking

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Handbrake 87
Parking 88 

86 Driving
The wear and tear on the brake pads is dependent on the operating condi- WARNING (Continued)
tions and driving style. In difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving), the ■ Do not depress the brake pedal, if there is no requirement to slow down.
condition of the brakes should be checked between services by a specialist ga- This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking
rage. distance and excessive wear - risk of accident!
Brake response can be slower if the brakes are covered in moisture or, in win- ■ Only brake for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the
ter, have a layer of ice or salt on them. The brakes should be cleaned and traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
dried by applying the brakes many times over » . ■ Recommendations for new brake pads should be followed.
■ When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads can occur if the vehicle firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - risk of accident!
has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the ■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
braking system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
over » . Otherwise, the front brakes could be in danger of overheating – risk of acci-
Before negotiating a long or steep gradient, reduce speed and shift down a dent!
gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the
load on the brakes. If, nevertheless, there is a need for additional braking, it
should be carried out at intervals.
Handbrake
Emergency braking warning - if it is necessary to brake hard, the system may Fig. 102
cause the brake lights to automatically flash, to alert the traffic behind. Handbrake
New brake pads must first be ““run in”” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
If the brake fluid level is too low, it can cause faults in the braking system;
the warning light  will illuminate in the instrument cluster » page 30,
Braking system. If the warning light does not light up, yet the stopping dis-
tance is perceived to be longer than before, the driving style should be adap-
ted in view of the unknown cause of the problem, and braking kept to a mini-  Read and observe on page 87 first.
mum - seek the help of a specialist garage without delay.
The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stop-
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The ping and parking.
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
Apply
WARNING › Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
■ Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
Release
ed off – risk of accident!
■ The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with man-
› Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 102.
ual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise,
the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident!
› Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning light  lights up when the handbrake is applied, pro-
vided the ignition is on. 

Starting-off and Driving 87


A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the Manual gear changing
handbrake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven
at a speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
Fig. 103
WARNING The shift pattern
Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially
disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a nega-
tive effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident!

Parking
 Read and observe on page 87 first.
The shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lever
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » . » Fig. 103.
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order. The gearshift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 38.
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal. Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
› Firmly apply the handbrake. to the clutch.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P Engaging reverse gear
position.
› Switch off the engine. › Stop the vehicle.
› For vehicles with Manual transmission, select 1st gear or Reverse gear R. › The clutch pedal must be fully depressed.
› Release the brake pedal. › Switch the gear lever to N.
› Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into
WARNING R» Fig. 103.
■ The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never The reversing lights will come on once the reverse gear is engaged, provided
stop the vehicle in places where the underside of your vehicle could come the ignition is on.
into contact with flammable materials (e.g. dry grass, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like). - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur! WARNING
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people unattended in the car who
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
could, for example, lock the vehicle or release the brake - risk of accidents
and injury!
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear shift
Manual gear changing and pedals lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gear shift mech-
anism to wear excessively.
 Introduction
Pedals
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual gear changing 88 The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances! 

Pedals 88

88 Driving
Only a floor mat (ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range) Select selector lever position
which can be secured to the attachment points should be used in the driver's
footwell.
Fig. 104
WARNING Selector lever/display
There should be no objects in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal op-
eration can be impeded - risk of accident!

Automatic gearbox

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:  Read and observe and on page 89 first.

Select selector lever position 89 The selector lever can be moved by shifting to one of the following positions
Selector lever lock 90 » Fig. 104. In some positions you have to push the locking button » page 90.
Manual shifting (Tiptronic) 90 When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
Starting-off and driving 91 gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 104.
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective of P Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
selected driving mode. R Reverse gear - the position can only be selected when the vehicle is sta-
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by tionary and the engine is idling.
means of the selector lever. N Neutral (idle position) - power transmission to the drive wheels is inter-
rupted.
WARNING D/S Forward mode / sports programme - the gear change takes place in the
■ Do not accelerate when selecting drive mode prior to moving off - risk of position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
accident!  (Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S
■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
dent! In mode D or S, the forward gears are shifted automatically depending on the
■ If the vehicle stalls, with engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic mode, engine load, the operation of the accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed, and the
then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of the selected driving mode .
brake pedal, parking brake or using the Auto Hold function. Even when the
engine is idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted –
the vehicle crawls forward.
■ When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle could be set in motion - risk of accident!

CAUTION
If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S whilst
driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.

Starting-off and Driving 89


Selector lever lock Manual shifting (Tiptronic)

Fig. 105 Fig. 106


Shift lock button Selector lever

 Read and observe and on page 89 first.  Read and observe and on page 89 first.

The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever.
mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion. This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
up to 5 km/h. › Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right-
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light . hand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained.

Releasing selector lever from mode P or N (selector lever lock) Gear changing
› Press the brake pedal and the lock button at the same time in the direction › To change up, tap the selector lever forwards + » Fig. 106.
of 1 » Fig. 105 . › To change down, tap the selector lever backwards - » Fig. 106.
To move the selector lever from mode N to D / S only the brake pedal is press- The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » Fig. 104 on page 89.
ed. The gearshift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 38.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi- is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de- over revving.
pressed.
Note
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man-
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual
ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 149.
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
Note hence the wear of the brakes.
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver-
sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being ac-
cidentally selected.

90 Driving
Starting-off and driving Tips on economical driving
 Read and observe and on page 89 first. Fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road and weather conditions,
and similar such factors.
Moving off and pausing temporarily
› Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal. For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
› Start the engine. ▶ Engage the recommended gear » page 38.
› Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position ▶ Avoid full throttle and high speeds.
» page 89.
▶ Reduce idling.
› Release the brake pedal and accelerate. ▶ Avoid short distances.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a ▶ Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained » page 134.
short time (e.g. at a crossroads). However, the brake pedal should be de- ▶ Avoid unnecessary ballast.
pressed, in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling. ▶ Remove the roof rack before driving if it is not needed.
▶ Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as necessary.
Accelerating at maximum speed during the journey (kickdown function)
▶ Briefly ventilate before turning on the cooling system, do not use the cooling
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is in forward drive mode,
the kick-down function is turned on. system with the windows open.
▶ Do not leave windows open at high speeds.
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to achieve maximum acceleration.
WARNING DriveGreen function
Rapid acceleration ( e.g. on slippery roads) can lead to a loss of control over
the vehicle – risk of accident! Fig. 107
Shown in the infotainment dis-
play
Running in and economical driving

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Running in the engine 91
Tips on economical driving 91 The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the
DriveGreen function 91 driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style.
DriveGreen can be displayed on the Infotainment as follows.
Running in the engine
› Press the button in Infotainment and then tap on the  → DriveGreen
During the first 1,500 km, the driving style is decisive for the success of the function surfaces in the display.
running in process.
A driving liquid display
During the first 1,000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than When the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer. dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking. 
From about 1,000 to 1,500 km, the engine can be pushed up to the maximum
permitted engine speed.

Starting-off and Driving 91


B “Green leaf”
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi-
cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com-  Introduction
pletely hidden.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
C bar graph
The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar Driving Tips 92
shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left. Driving through water 92
D scoring (0 - 100)
The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When
Driving Tips
you tap the function surface D , a detailed assessment showing the driving ef- Only drive on roads and terrain that are appropriate to the vehicle parameters
ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed. » page 160, Technical data.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can cope
the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green). with the conditions and the terrain.
E the average fuel consumption from the start
WARNING
When you tap the E function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the ■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
bars are shown in dark green). the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
F symbols
The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on CAUTION
the current driving style. ■ Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
 Economical driving style jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
■ Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
 The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. to parts of
 If the driving is not fluid, drive with anticipation
the fuel or brake system).
 Recommended gear
Tips for economical driving Driving through water
Tap on the B leaf to display tips for economical driving.
Fig. 108
Note
Maximum permissible water lev-
Resetting the single-trip memory “Since start” also resets the average con- el when driving through water 
sumption E and the driving assessment D .

92 Driving
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
Assist systems
› Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through water. General information
The water level must not go above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 108.
› Drive at no more than walking pace, otherwise a wave may form in front of  Introduction
the vehicle, which could cause the water to enter into the vehicle’s systems
(e.g. the air intake system for the engine). WARNING
› Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off. ■ The assistance systems only serve to support and do not relieve the driv-
er of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
CAUTION ■ The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec-
■ If water gets into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the en- tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks -
gine) it can cause serious damage to the vehicle! risk of accident!
■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis- ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
sible water level for your vehicle. and traffic conditions.
■ Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle ■ The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa- this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system
ter. responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and
ready to intervene!
■ Only enable, disable or set the assistance systems so that you have the
vehicle fully under control in every traffic situation - risk of accident!

Braking and stabilisation systems

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Stability Control (ESC) 94
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 94
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 94
Traction control (TCS) 94
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 95
Brake Assist (HBA) 95
Hill Start Assist (HHC) 95
Multi collision brake (MCB) 95
Trailer stabilization system (TSA) 95
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
The error display is in Chapter » page 29, Warning lights. 

Assist systems 93
WARNING Traction control (TCS)
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 93, in section Introduction. Fig. 109
Button for the TCS system:
Stability Control (ESC)
 Read and observe on page 94 first.

The ESC improves vehicle stability when driving at the limit (e.g. if the vehicle
starts to skid) by braking individual wheels to maintain the desired direction.
If there is an ESC intervention, the warning light  flashes in the instrument
cluster.  Read and observe on page 94 first.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) TCS prevents the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle. TCS reduces the
drive power transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for
 Read and observe on page 94 first. example, driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to During a TCS intervention, the indicator light  flashes in the instrument clus-
maintain control of the vehicle. ter.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of The deactivation/activation of TCS can be carried out, depending on equip-
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises. ment, in one of the following ways.
▶ Infotainment » Owner's Manual - Infotainment.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres- ▶ By pressing the  » Fig. 109 button.
sure on the brake pedal.
With deactivation, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster  and
Engine drag torque control (MSR) an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
With activation, the warning light  is extinguished and an appropriate mes-
 Read and observe on page 94 first.
sage is displayed in the instrument cluster.
MSR counteracts the tendency of the drive wheels to lock during downshifts The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
or sudden deceleration (e.g. on icy or an otherwise slippery road surface). only in the following situations, for example.
▶ When driving with snow chains.
If the drive wheels should lock, then the engine speed is automatically in-
▶ When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
creased. This reduces the braking effect of the engine and the wheels can ro-
▶ When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
tate freely again.

94 Driving
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) Multi collision brake (MCB)
 Read and observe on page 94 first.  Read and observe on page 94 first.

EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking
brakes a spinning wheel if required and transfers the drive power force to the interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subse-
other drive wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different trac- quent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
tion under each wheel of the driven axle.
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi-
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation tions are met.
on the brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down,  There was a front, side and rear-end collision of a certain severity.
there is an automatic re-activation of EDL.  The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h.
 The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function-
Brake Assist (HBA) al after impact.
 Read and observe on page 94 first.  The accelerator pedal is not actuated.

The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis- Trailer stabilization system (TSA)
tance.
The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
 Read and observe on page 94 first.
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap- The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill. and then the whole trailer combination.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re- TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the
leased. rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
Hill Start Assist (HHC)
 The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
 Read and observe on page 94 first. genuine accessories.
 The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
When moving off on a gradient, HHC allows you to move your foot from the trailer socket.
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill.
 The TCS is activated.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the  The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
brake pedal.
Further information » page 108, Towing device and trailer.
The HHC is active on gradients upwards up 5 % if the driver door is closed. HHC
is only ever active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off.

Assist systems 95
Parking aid (ParkPilot) Function

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function 96
Display in the Infotainment display 97
Activation / deactivation 97
Automatic system activation when moving forward 98
The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) draws attention via acous-
tic signals or the Infotainment display when manoeuvring around obstacles in
the vicinity of the vehicle. Fig. 110 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehicle:
front / rear
WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 93, in section Introduction. Fig. 111
■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors. Sampled areas and range of the
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of sensors
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be recognised by the system sen-
sors.
■ Before reversing, you should satisfy yourself that there are no small ob-
stacle, such as a rock, thin post etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such
obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
 Read and observe and on page 96 first.

The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
CAUTION bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
■ Keep the system sensors » Fig. 110 on page 96 clean, snow-and ice-free equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 110.
and do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system function- Depending on the equipment, the following system variants are possible
ing may be impaired. » Fig. 111.
■ In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high ▶ Variant 1: warns of obstacles in the areas C , D .
temperatures, etc.), the functioning of the system may be impaired - “incorrect ▶ Variant 2: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D . 
recognition of obstacles”.
■ Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
can impair the system function.

96 Driving
Approximate range of sensors (in cm)    Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
Area » Fig. 111 Variant 1 Variant 2 play.
(3 sensors) (7 sensors)    Switching audible parking signals on/off.
A - 120  Change to rear-view camera display.
B - 60  There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle
is less than 30 cm).  Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
C 160 160
 There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great-
D 60 60
er than 30 cm).
Audible signals  An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta-
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is cle is greater than 30 cm).
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound -  System failure (there is no indication of obstacles).
danger area. From this moment do not continue to move towards the obsta-
cle! Road display
The road display A » Fig. 112 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
The acoustic signals can be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - Infotain-
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
ment.
The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
Towing a trailer road display is at the front.
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket on-
ly the areas A and B » Fig. 111 are active in the system.
Activation / deactivation
Note
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher Fig. 113
than for rear obstacle recognition. System key (option 2)

Display in the Infotainment display

Fig. 112
Display

 Read and observe and on page 96 first.

Activation
The activation of the system is initiated when the reverse gear is engaged, or
vehicles with the variant 2, also by pressing the button  » Fig. 113.

 Read and observe and on page 96 first. When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol  illuminates in the button.
Deactivation
Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 112 On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of re-
A Road display. verse gear. 

Assist systems 97
For vehicles with variant 2, the system is automatically deactivated by press- Reversing camera
ing the  button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the  symbol in the button
goes out).  Introduction
Displaying an error This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
If a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds after activating the system and there
is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is also Operation 99
indicated by the symbol  flashing in the button. Seek help from a specialist Guidelines and function surfaces 99
garage.
The rear view camera (following as system) helps the driver when parking and
Note manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment dis-
The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15 play (following as display).
km/h. WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
Automatic system activation when moving forward be observed » page 93, in section Introduction.
■ The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system function
Fig. 114 will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For information on
Infotainment display: Display cleaning » page 120, Exterior car care.
with automatic activation
CAUTION
■ The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. The display is
therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehicles.
■ Some items, such as thin columns, chain link fences or lattice, may not be
represented adequately in terms of display resolution.
■ In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
 Read and observe and on page 96 first. correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
rage.
The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be-
low 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle. Note
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment The camera can be equipped with a cleaning system » page 60. The spraying is
display » Fig. 114. carried out automatically when the rear window is sprayed.

Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around


50 cm.
The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in Infotainment » Owner
´s Manual - Infotainment.

98 Driving
Operation Guidelines and function surfaces

Fig. 115 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the ve- Fig. 116 Infotainment Display: Orientation lines / functional surfaces
hicle
 Read and observe and on page 98 first.
 Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Orientation lines are shown along with the monitored area behind the vehicle
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot in the display.
lid » Fig. 115.
Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » Fig. 116
Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 115 A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
A Detection range of the camera B The distance is about 100 cm.
B Area outside the detection range of the camera C The distance is about 200 cm.
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol- The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
lowing basic conditions. road inclination.
 The ignition is switched on.
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
 The reverse gear is engaged.1) width including mirrors.
 The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
Functional surfaces » Fig. 116
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
   Depending on the Infotainment Type: Turns the display of the area be-
 The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible. hind the vehicle off
 The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.  Display settings - brightness, contrast, colour
Note    Switching on/off audible parking signals
■ The display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol button  » Fig. 113 on    Switching on/off the reduced park assistance display
page 97.  Change to park assistance display 
■ After disengaging the reverse gear, automatic display of the parking aid is
carried out (variant 2, 3) » page 96.

1) The area behind the vehicle can be displayed for a few seconds more after disengaging the reverse gear.

Assist systems 99
CAUTION
The objects shown in the display can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
■ Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
■ When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
■ When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.

Cruise Control System

 Introduction
Fig. 118 Segment display: Examples of status displays the CCS
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation 100  Read and observe on page 100 first.
Operation description 101 CCS status displays » Fig. 117, » Fig. 118
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to  Speed set, but control is inactive.
actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is  Control is active.
referred to hereinafter as the control.  No speed set.
WARNING  System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must Basic requirements for starting the control
be observed » page 93, in section Introduction.  The CCS is activated.
■ After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-  On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is en-
ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is gaged.
continued.  On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the
D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
Operation  The current speed is higher than 20 km/h.
This, however, is only possible to the extent permitted by the engine output
and braking power of the vehicle.

WARNING
If the engine output or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the
set speed, the driver must assume control of the accelerator and brake
pedals!

Fig. 117 MAXI DOT display: Examples of status displays the CCS

100 Driving
Operation description Note
■ During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
Fig. 119 leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
Cruise control system controls speed.
■ By pressing the button D during the regulation, this is cancelled and the
speed limiter is activated.

Speed limiter

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe on page 100 first.
Operation 101
Overview of the CCS controls » Fig. 119 Description of operation 102
A  Activate CCS (control deactivated) The speed limiter limits the maximum driving speed to the set speed limit.
 Interrupt control (sprung position) This limit can only be exceeded by depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
 Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
The condition in which the speed limiter monitors a potential set speed limit
B  Take control againa) / Increase speed excess is referred to as Regulation.
C  Start control / reduce speed
D  Switching between CCS and speed limiter WARNING
a)
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
observed » page 93, in section Introduction.
Once the controls are activated, the CCS maintains the vehicle at the set
speed; the warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster.
Operation
Controls are automatically interrupted if any of the following occur.
▶ The brake pedal is operated.
▶ When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
▶ Through an airbag deployment.
▶ By pressing the button D .

WARNING
■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
■ Control may only be resumed if the set speed is not too high for the cur-
rent traffic conditions.
Fig. 120 MAXI DOT display: Examples of speed limiter status displays 

Assist systems 101


To activate the speed limiter, the switch must be adjusted to posi-
tion , then press D to operate.
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Deactivate speed limiter (set limit delete)
B  Take control again a) / increase speed - press (in increments of 1
km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C  Start regulation / reduce speed - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
D  Switching between CCS and speed limiter
Fig. 121 Segment display: Examples of Speed Limiter status displays a) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.

 Read and observe on page 101 first. After starting the system, the current speed is set as the speed limit, the
warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster.
Status displays of the speed limiter» Fig. 120, » Fig. 121
Exceeding the speed limit during the regulation
 Speed limit set, but regulation is inactive. If, during the control, it is necessary to exceed the speed limit (e.g. to over-
 Control is active. take), the accelerator pedal must be pressed fully.
 No speed limit set.
When exceeding the speed limit (e.g. driving down a hill), an acoustic signal
 System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. sounds and the warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster.
Basic requirements for start of control The regulation is resumed once the speed has fallen below the set limit.
 The speed limiter is activated.
 The current speed is higher than 30 km/h. Note
By pressing the button D during the regulation this is cancelled and the CCS is
Description of operation activated.

Fig. 122 Front Assist


Operating elements of the speed
limiter  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Radar sensor 103
Operation 103
Distance warning 104
Warning and automatic braking 104
 Read and observe on page 101 first. Deactivation/activation 105
Malfunctions 105 
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 122
A  Activate CCS (required condition for the subsequent activation of
the speed limiter)

102 Driving
The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) warns you of the danger of WARNING
a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and tries to ■ If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the system. Have
avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the the sensor checked by a specialist garage.
brakes where necessary. ■ A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor » Fig. 123 on the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by
page 103. a specialist garage.
■ Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can
WARNING lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accidents!
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 93, in section Introduction. CAUTION
■ The system does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects. Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent-free de-icer.

CAUTION Operation
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable.  Read and observe and on page 103 first.

The system support is provided in the following manner.


Radar sensor ▶ Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
▶ Warns you of an impending collision.
Fig. 123 ▶ Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
Installation location of the radar ▶ If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, an automatic braking ac-
sensor tion is performed.
The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
 The system is activated.
 TCS is activated » page 94.
 The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.

Note
 Read and observe and on page 103 first.
The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
The radar sensor » Fig. 123(hereinafter referred to as the sensor) may detect in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 94.
objects by radiating and receiving electromagnetic waves.
The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following.
▶ The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow and the like).
▶ The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights and the like).
▶ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).

If the sensor is dirty or covered, the corresponding message appears on the


display of the instrument cluster » page 105, Malfunctions.

Assist systems 103


Distance warning Advance warning
If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light  » Fig. 125 appears
in the display and you will hear an acoustic signal.
Fig. 124
Instrument cluster display: Distance warning The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations.
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle at a driving speed range
of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 210 km/h.
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle at a driving speed
range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 85 km/h.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is to
be avoided!
Acute alert
 Read and observe and on page 103 first. If the driver does not react to the advance warning when in danger of a colli-
The display of the distance warning is for vehicles with MAXI DOT display. sion with a moving obstacle, the system briefly applies the brake automatically
via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a
If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is fallen short of, the warning light collision again.
 » Fig. 124 appears in the display.
Automatic Braking
Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows you If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to auto-
to do so! matically brake the vehicle.
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed. If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h. the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
Warning and automatic braking The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by steering intervention.
Fig. 125 Brake assist
Instrument cluster display: Warning or emergency If the driver brakes inadequate with an impending collision, the system auto-
braking at low speed matically increases braking force.
The braking assistance only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly
pressed down.

 Read and observe and on page 103 first.

Emergency braking at low speed


If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 30
km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
With automatic braking, the warning light  » Fig. 125 appears in the display.

104 Driving
Deactivation/activation If the distance-warning function was deactivated before switching off the igni-
tion, it remains deactivated after switching on the ignition.

WARNING
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety
reasons.
■ When the vehicle is being towed away.
■ When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench.
■ If an unfounded warning or a system action was taken.
■ When on a truck, or a vehicle ferry service or similar.

Malfunctions
Fig. 126 Keys / dial: on the operating lever / on the multifunction steering
wheel  Read and observe and on page 103 first.

 Read and observe and on page 103 first. If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate mes-
sage appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
The system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.
Sensor covered / dirty
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » . If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
On vehicles with the MAXI DOT display, the system can be activated/deactiva- view appears. Clean the sensor cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 123 on
ted in the main menu » page 42, Menu itemAssist systems. page 103.

Deactivation / activation in vehicles with segment display System unavailable


If the system is currently unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability
Button
Action Operation appears. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the
» Fig. 126
system still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
A Hold up / down Show Front Assist menu item
B Press Deactivate/activate system Fatigue detection
Deactivation / activation in vehicles with multi-function steering wheel The fatigue detection system (hereinafter referred to as system) recommends
Button / the driver takes a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected due
dial Action Operation to the driver's steering behaviour.
» Fig. 126 From the starting of the journey, the system evaluates the steering behaviour
C Press Show Front Assist menu item at speeds 65-200 km/h. If, while driving, there have been changes in the steer-
ing behaviours that are evaluated by the system as indicating possible fatigue,
D Press Deactivate/activate system
a break recommendation is issued.
Disable / enable and setting in the Infotainment Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
In Infotainment, the entire system or the functions warning and distance ▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
warning can be deactivated/activated » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment. ▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes. 

Assist systems 105


If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the WARNING
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes. ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
The system can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s Man- be observed » page 93, in section Introduction.
ual - Infotainment. ■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 134.
Pause recommendation ■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
of the instrument cluster  and a message about the detected fatigue. An au-
dible signal is also emitted.
Storing the tyre pressure values.
WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must  Read and observe on page 106 first.
be observed » page 93, in section Introduction. The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system, if one of the fol-
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
lowing events occurs.
you feel tired. ▶ Change of tyre inflation pressure.
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed. ▶ Change one or more wheels.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips. ▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep. ▶ The warning light in the instrument cluster.

Note The storage of the tyre pressure values depends on equipment, either in the
infotainment or by pressing a button.
■ In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus
mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather condi- WARNING
tions or poor road conditions). Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified in-
■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
flation pressure » page 134. When storing incorrect pressure values, the
system could possibly not issue any warnings, even with a too low tyre
Tyre pressure monitoring pressure.

 Introduction CAUTION
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The tyre pressure values are to be saved every 10,000 km or once annually to
ensure correct system functioning.
Storing the tyre pressure values. 106
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display 107
Storing the tyre pressure values by means of the key 107
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to as the system)
monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light  lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal is heard» page 33,  Tyre pressure.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.

106 Driving
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display  Read and observe on page 106 first.

› Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.


Fig. 127 › Switch on the ignition.
Button for storing the pressure › Press the symbol button  » Fig. 128 on the button.
values / display example: the
The warning light  in the instrument cluster illuminates.
system shows a front right tyre
pressure change An acoustic signal and the control indicator provide information about the
storage of the tyre pressure values.
› Release the symbol key  .

 Read and observe on page 106 first.

› Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.


› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Press the  button in Infotainment and then tap on the  Tap → Vehicle
status.
› Use the function surfaces   Select the menu item Tyre Pressure Loss Indi-
cator.
› Tap on the function   Tap on» Fig. 127.
In addition, follow the instructions that appear on the display.
A message in the display informs about the storage of the tyre pressure val-
ues.
Note
When a warning light in the instrument cluster appears, the affected tyre
can be displayed on the infotainment » Fig. 127.

Storing the tyre pressure values by means of the key

Fig. 128
Key for storing the pressure val-
ues

Assist systems 107


Towing device and trailer Description

Hitch

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description 108
Adjusting the ready position 109
Check the setting of the standby position 109
Assembling the bar ball - Step 1 110
Assembling the bar ball - Step 2 110 Fig. 129 Carrier for the towing device/tow bar
Check proper fitting 111
Removing the bar ball - Step 1. 111  Read and observe on page 108 first.
Removing the bar ball - Step 2. 111
The ball rod is detachable and is located in the stowage compartment for the
Vertical load with mounted accessories 112 spare / emergency wheel.
The maximum trailer nose weight when towing a trailer is 50 kg. Other infor- Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 129
mation (e.g. on the nameplate of the towing device) provide information only 1 Cap
about the test values of the device.
2 Mounting recess
WARNING 3 Protective cap
■ Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting 4 locking ball
recess before the start of every journey. 5 Centering
■ When the ball rod is not properly secured in the receiving shaft, it could 6 Handwheel
be damaged or incomplete, and should not be used - there is a risk of acci- 7 Key
dent.
■ Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way.
8 Lock cap
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times. 9 Red marking on the handwheel
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely. 10 Tow bar
11 Green marking on the handwheel
12 White marking on tow bar

108 Driving
Adjusting the ready position Check the setting of the standby position

Fig. 130 Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock Fig. 132 Ready position

 Read and observe on page 108 first.

Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 132


 The key A is in the unlocked position - the arrow on the key points to the
symbol .
 The locking ball B can be pushed fully into the tow bar.
 The red marking C on the hand wheel points to the white marking on the
ball bar.
 There is a clear gap of approx. 4 mm D between the hand wheel and the
tow bar.
Fig. 131 Setting the ready position
When in the ready position, the key cannot be removed from the lock. The ball
bar is thus set ready for installation.
 Read and observe on page 108 first.

The tow bar must be set prior to installation to the standby position
» page 109, Check the setting of the standby position.
› Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
› Remove the cover A from the lock in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 130.
› Insert the key into the lock B in the direction of arrow 2, so that the arrow
on the key symbol  shows.
› Turn the key B to the stop in the direction of arrow 3, so that the arrow on
the key points to the  » Fig. 131 symbol.
› Pull the hand wheel C in the direction of the arrow 4 and turn in the direc-
tion of the arrow 5 to the stop. The hand wheel C remains locked in this
position.

Towing device and trailer 109


Assembling the bar ball - Step 1 Assembling the bar ball - Step 2

Fig. 133 Remove cap for receiving shaft / use ball bar Fig. 134 Secure the lock and remove key / place cap on lock

 Read and observe on page 108 first.  Read and observe on page 108 first.

The tow bar must be set to the standby position » page 109, Check the setting › To begin with, follow the first step for the ball rod assembly » page 110.
of the standby position. If this is not in the standby position, then it must be › Turn the key A in the direction of arrow 1, so that the arrow on the key
set to the standby position » page 109, Adjusting the ready position. symbol » Fig. 134 shows.
› To prepare for the installation, remove the cap for the receiving shaft A in
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 2 .
direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 133. › Fit the cap B on the lock in the direction of the arrow 3.

› To install, hold the ball rod from underneath » Fig. 133. › Check that the ball rod is securely attached » page 111.
› Push the ball rod into the receiving shaft in the direction of arrow 2 until it WARNING
stops. The ball rod must audibly snap into place » . After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key. The
The hand wheel B rotates back automatically and rests on the ball rod » . tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted.

WARNING
Do not hold the handwheel with your hand when attaching the ball bar -
there is a risk of finger injury.

110 Driving
Check proper fitting Fig. 137
Unlock lock
Fig. 135
Correctly secured ball head

 Read and observe on page 108 first.

 Read and observe on page 108 first. No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. We recommend put-
ting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar.
Correctly secured ball rod » Fig. 135
 The tow bar does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy › Remove the cover A from the lock in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 136.
“shaking”. › Insert the key into the lock B in the direction of arrow 2, so that the arrow
on the key symbol  shows.
 The green marking A on the handwheel points to the white marking on
the tow bar.
› Turn the keyB in the direction of arrow 3, so that the arrow on the key
symbol » Fig. 137 shows.
 The handwheel is tight against the ball rod.
 The lock is locked and the key is removed. Removing the bar ball - Step 2.
 The cap B is on the lock.
Fig. 138
Removing the bar ball - Step 1. Release tow bar

 Read and observe on page 108 first.

Removal
Fig. 136 Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock › Grasp the ball bar from below » Fig. 138.
› Pull the hand wheel A in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Turn the pulled handwheel in the arrow direction 2 until it stops. Hold it in
this position. 

Towing device and trailer 111


› Remove the tow bar from the mounting recess downwards and in the direc- Distance of the centre of gravity of Permissible total weight of the ac-
tion of the arrow 3 . At the same time, the ball rod latches into the ready po- the load from the ball head cessory, including load
sition and is therefore ready to be re-fitted.
0 cm 50 kg
After removing the ball rod, insert the cap for the receiving shaft A against 30 cm 50 kg
the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 133 on page 110.
60 cm 25 kg
If the hand wheel A is not turned all the way to the stop, then it will return to 70 cm 0 kg
its initial position when the tow bar is removed and will rest on the tow bar
and not engage into the ready position. The ball head then needs to be CAUTION
brought into this position before the next time it is fitted » page 109, Adjusting Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
the ready position. maximum length of the accessories - risk of damage to the towing device.
The ball rod must be cleaned before it is stored in the box with the tool kit.
Note
WARNING We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause
damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the Use the towing device
occupants at risk.
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Fig. 140
Swivel out the 13-pin power
Fig. 139
socket, safety eyelet
Representation of the maximum
length of the mounted accesso-
ries and the permissible total
weight of the accessory depend-
ing on the load centre of gravity

Connect and disconnect


 Read and observe on page 108 first.
› Install the ball rod and remove the protective cap 3 » Fig. 129 on page 108.
› Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the ball head.
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the › Grip the 13-pin socket on the handle A and swing out in the direction of the
permissible total weight including load must be considered. arrow » Fig. 140.
› Insert the connector of the trailer cable into the 13-pin socket. (If the trailer /
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing accessories have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding reduction piece
device) is 70 cm » Fig. 139. from the ŠKODA Original Accessories).
The total permitted weight of the accessories including load changes with in- › Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet B (the
creasing distance of the load centre of gravity from the ball head of the towing breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
device. Uncoupling takes place in reverse order. 

112 Driving
Exterior mirrors WARNING (Continued)
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the ■ After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory)
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors. the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
■ Never use the securing eye to tow - risk of accident!
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the head- CAUTION
lights » page 54. ■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
■ The total power consumption of all the connected consumers to the trailer
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
power supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage
trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
to the electrical system of the vehicle.
switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec- Loading a trailer
ted consumers.
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 134.
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted. Distribution of the cargo
Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
WARNING close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
trailer is laden. Nevertheless, maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot
■ Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
avoid driving with this combination.
and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
trical shock. WARNING
A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety
- there is a risk of accident!

Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
Permissible trailer load
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12% Gradients of up to 8%a)
MG 900 1000 580
1.2 ltr./66 kW TSI
DSG 900 1000 590
1.2 l./81 kW TSI MG 1100 1200 590
DSG 1200 1200 600
1.4 l./92 kW TSI
DSG (Green tec) 1200 1200 610 

Towing device and trailer 113


Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12% Gradients of up to 8%a)
1.6 l./66 kW MPI MG 1000 1100 570
MG 1000 1100 580
1.6 l./81 kW MPI
AG 1000 1100 600
MG 1000 1100 610
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR
DSG 1000 1100 620
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1200 1200 640
a) Only valid for some countries.

WARNING Anti-theft alarm system


The maximum vertical load and the maximum trailer load must not be ex-
ceeded - there is risk of accident! The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (herein-
after only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
is interrupted.
Towing a trailer
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
Driving speed coupled or uncoupled » page 49.
For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
(when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when
 The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1).
device.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the  The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by acceler- means of the trailer socket.
ating.
 The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional.
Brakes  The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply  The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights.
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.

WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.

CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.

114 Driving
General Maintenance Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
 Read and observe on page 115 first.
Care and maintenance
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA Partner. He or she
will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full func-
 Introduction tioning of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant, changing the battery
or similar).
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions 115 Statutory checks
Statutory checks 115
ŠKODA Service partner 115  Read and observe on page 115 first.
ŠKODA Original parts 116 Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability, safety and,
ŠKODA Original accessories 116 where applicable, roadworthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle
Spoiler 116 to be tested at regular intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops
Component protection 116 or testing stations that have been legally authorized for this purpose.
Airbags 116 The ŠKODA Service Partners can prepare your vehicle for the official inspec-
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 117 tions, so as to ensure that it passes.
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO must be observed when us- Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for
ing accessories or carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical altera- prior checking in preparation for a legally required test, we recommend that
tions to your vehicle. you consult your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. ŠKODA Service partner

WARNING  Read and observe on page 115 first.


■ Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle should only be
All ŠKODA Service Partners work according to the instructions and guidelines
carried out by a specialist. Work carried out incorrectly (including work on from ŠKODA AUTO. All service and repair work is therefore carried out on time
the electronic components and their software) can result in malfunctions - and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions and guidelines
there is a risk of accident and, potentially, increased wear on parts! helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical con-
■ We recommend that you use only ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA
dition.
Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle.
Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these. We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
■ Do not use any products which have not been approved by ŠKODA AUTO, tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
even though these may be products with a type approval or which have
been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.

Care and maintenance 115


ŠKODA Original parts Spoiler
 Read and observe on page 115 first.  Read and observe on page 115 first.

We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these WARNING
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts comply wholly with ŠKODA If your vehicle is equipped with a Genuine Accessories spoiler on the front
AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series production. bumper in combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following in-
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these structions must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and se-
products. rious injuries!
■ The vehicle can only be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability, ■ A Genuine Accessories spoiler cannot be fitted to the front bumper either
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement. on its own (without a spoiler on the boot lid) or in combination with an un-
suitable spoiler on the boot lid.
ŠKODA Original accessories ■ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any re-
pairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
 Read and observe on page 115 first.
■ Unprofessional work carried out on the spoilers of your vehicle may result
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow- in issues with some functions/vehicle systems.
ing.
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle. Component protection
ŠKODA AUTO has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor  Read and observe on page 115 first.
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch the suitability of other products Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac-
for your vehicle, despite the fact that some products may have operational ap- tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita-
proval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laborato- tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle
ry. (e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Accesso-
ries for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the Airbags
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement
or any other agreements.  Read and observe on page 115 first.

WARNING
■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tyre combinations, can impair the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury! 

116 General Maintenance


WARNING The following is taken to mean aggravated operating conditions:
▶ Fuel containing sulphur.
■ No changes may be made to airbag system components, the front bump-
▶ Frequent short trips.
er and the bodywork.
▶ Longer periods of engine idling (e.g. taxis).
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
▶ Operation in areas with heavy dust pollution.
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
▶ Frequent trailer operation.
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
▶ Predominantly stop-and-go traffic as is e.g. often the case in city driving.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
▶ Operation predominantly during winter.
sult in the airbag being deployed.
■ If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must be replaced. You will be told at the specialist garage whether the operating conditions of
your vehicle may make it necessary for service work to be carried out between
the normal service intervals.
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles
Different service charges may apply according to the particular scope of work
 Read and observe on page 115 first. required, the vehicle type and specification, and your vehicle’s condition.
All new ŠKODA vehicles are 95% recyclable. Note
■ The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including
Service intervals changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless sta-
ted otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other agreements.
 Introduction ■ You will be informed about the service checks and actions at each service by
the specialist garage.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview of service intervals 117 Overview of service intervals
Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4 118
Variable service interval QI6 118 Fig. 141
Digital Service Plan 118 Vehicle data: Service interval
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will remind
you to carry out every service stipulated by the manufacturer at the right time
in order to prevent you from forgetting any» page 42.
The completion of services can be verified through the printed verification
from the digital service schedule and the respective receipts.
The specified service intervals are tailored to normal operating conditions.
In the case of aggravated operating conditions, it will be necessary to have The service interval specified by the manufacturer is indicated on the vehicle
some service work carried out before the date of the next regular service or data carrier » Fig. 141 which can be found both in this Owner's Manual as well
between the specified service intervals. This applies mainly to the cleaning or as in the vehicle.
the replacement of the air filter insert in regions with heavy dust pollution as One of the following service intervals applies for your vehicle.
well as checking and replacing the toothed belt, but also to vehicles with die- ▶ Fixed service interval QI1.
sel particle filters, which can put greater strain on the engine oil. ▶ Fixed service interval QI2.
▶ Fixed service interval QI3. 

Care and maintenance 117


▶ Fixed service interval QI4. Note
▶ Variable service interval QI6.
For diesel operation with a high sulphur content, the oil must be changed ev-
In order to operate a vehicle with a variable service interval, it must only be ery 7,500 km. Ask your specialist garage for information on the countries
filled and topped up with the prescribed engine oil. where diesel fuel has a high sulphur content.
If this engine oil is not available, the oil change is subject to a fixed service in-
Variable service interval QI6
terval. In this case, the vehicle must be changed to the fixed service interval.
The oil change service intervals depend on the intensity at which the vehicle is
Note
driven and the local conditions in which the vehicle is used. For example, your
■ The corresponding motor oil specifications » page 128. vehicle is subjected to different demands when driven over short distances
■ For vehicles with variable service interval QI6 you can initiate a change to the than when driven over long distances. The intervals are therefore variable.
fixed service interval or back to the variable service interval to be carried out
by a specialist garage. Oil change serv- In accordance with the service interval display (after
ice 30,000 km or 2 yearsa) at the latest).
Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4 Inspectionb) After the first 30,000 km or 2 yearsa), then every 30,000
Variant 1 km or every 1 yeara).
QI1 Every 5,000 km or every 1 yeara). Inspectionb)
QI2 Every 7,500 km or every 1 yeara). Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara).
Oil change serv- Variant 2
ice QI3 Every 10,000 km or every 1 yeara). Brake fluid
First change after 3 years, then every 2 years.
QI4 Every 15,000 km or every 1 yeara). change
Inspectionb) After the first 30,000 km or 2 yearsa), then every a) Depending on which comes first.
Variant 1 30,000 km or every 1 yeara). b) For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner.

Inspectionb) WARNING
QI1 - QI4 Every 15,000 km or every 1 yeara).
Variant 2
The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then ev-
Inspectionb) ery 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause
Every 10,000 km or every 1 yeara).
Variant 3 vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can
Brake fluid impair the efficiency of the brakes – risk of accident!
QI1 - QI4 First change after 3 years, then every 2 years.
change
a)
b)
Depending on which comes first. Digital Service Plan
For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner.
A specialist garage will not record the work carried out in a service evidence in
WARNING this Owner's Manual, but in the service information system called Digital Serv-
The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then ev- ice Plan.
ery 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause
vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can We therefore recommend that you always have the record of work carried out
impair the efficiency of the brakes – risk of accident! in a service printed out for you.
Benefits of the Digital Service Plan
▶ High level of security preventing manipulation of the entries.
▶ Transparent documentation of service work carried out. 

118 General Maintenance


▶ Protection against loss or damage of the entries – you receive a complete re- Car washing
cord of the work carried out, if required.
▶ Option to receive the record in electronic form.  Read and observe and on page 119 first.
▶ The vehicle can be serviced in any specialist garage (also abroad) – the data-
base is accessible worldwide. The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
▶ Increased transparency when purchasing a used vehicle due to entries being is frequent washing.
stored centrally. The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de-
▶ The system entries support you in making a claim on the ŠKODA extended
posits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their de-
warranty and mobility guarantees. structive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive
sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
Cleaning and care It is also essential to thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
 Introduction
Washing by hand
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, with a soft sponge or a wash mitt and
Car washing 119 plenty of water, and, if necessary, with the appropriate detergents. Wash out
Exterior car care 120 the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Removing ice and snow from the windows 121 For wheels, door sills and lower areas of the vehicle use a different sponge.
Caring for the interior 122 Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
Regular and thorough care helps to retain the value of your vehicle. leather.
The instructions for use on the packaging must be observed when using care Automatic car washes
products. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Original Accessories care prod- The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
ucts. (e.g. closing the windows and the tilt/slide roof etc.).

WARNING If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts (e.g. spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial etc.) it is best to consult the operator of the car
■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
wash system beforehand.
to the instructions.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com- After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the wiper blades should be
pletely independent, e.g. children - danger of poisoning! cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de-
greased.
CAUTION Pressure washers
■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface. use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to instruc-
■ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - danger of dam- tions regarding the pressure and spraying distance from the vehicle surface. 
aging the surface to be cleaned.

Note
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and maintained at a ŠKODA Service
Partner.

Care and maintenance 119


WARNING Exterior car care
■ When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!  Read and observe and on page 119 first.
■ Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells -
there is a risk of injury from sharp metal parts! Vehicle compo-
Circumstances Remedy
nents
CAUTION Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
Spilled fuel
■ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body possible)
while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be no more than No water drop-
Use hard wax preserve (at least twice a
60 °C max. - otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint. lets form on the
Paint year), apply wax to clean and dry body
■ Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - risk of dam- paint
age. Use polish, then wax (if the polish does
■ For vehicles with roof antenna, the antenna rod should be unscrewed before Paint has gone
not contain any preservative ingredi-
driving through a car wash - there is a risk of damage. matt
ents)
CAUTION Clear water, cloth / sponge, possibly
Plastic parts Soiling
cleaners provided for this purpose
Washing the vehicle with high-pressure cleaners
■ Films should not be washed with any high-pressure cleaners - risk of dam- Chrome Clear water, cloth, possibly cleaners
age. and anodised Soiling provided for this purpose, clean then
■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening parts polish with a soft dry cloth
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing. Films Soiling Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona)
■ Hold at sufficient spraying distance to the rear camera lens, to plastic parts
Windows Wash with clean water and dry with a
(e.g. Roof racks, spoilers, protective strips etc.) As well as to soft materials Soiling
and door mirrors wipe specifically for that purpose
such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
■ The sensors of the parking aid can be sprayed only for a short time and there
Head lights /
Soiling Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona)
lights
must be a minimum distance of 10 cm - there is a risk of damage.
Wash with clean water and dry with a
Soiling
Reversing camera soft cloth
Snow/ice Hand brush / de-icer
Door lock cylin- De-icing fluid specifically for that pur-
Snow/ice
ders pose
Wiper / wiper
Soiling Windscreen cleaner, sponge or cloth
blades
Clear water, then apply appropriate
Wheels Soiling
substance
a) Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.

The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
be lubricated with a suitable lubricant. 

120 General Maintenance


The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing de- ■ Rubber seals
vice with a suitable grease whenever necessary. ■ Do not treat the door seals and window guides deal with anything - the
protective varnish coating could be damaged.
Protection of cavities ■ Windows and door mirrors
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected by ■ Do not clean the insides of the windows/mirrors with sharp objects - risk of
a layer of long-lasting protective wax applied in the factory.
damage to the filaments or the antenna.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these ■ Do not use a cloth which has been used to polish the body - this could dirty
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole- the window and impair visibility.
um cleaner. ■ Head lights / lights
■ Do not wipe headlight/lights dry, do not use any sharp objects - risk of
Underbody
damage to the protective coating and cracks forming on the headlight glass
The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
covers.
against chemical and mechanical influences. ■ Reversing camera
We recommend having the protective coating — preferably before the begin- The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
ning of winter and at the end of winter. camera damage.
■ Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
Product life of the films ■ To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect ■ For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
the life of the films. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal; ■ Door lock cylinders
this is not a fault. ■ Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder
Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour. when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
■ Wheels
When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is an
■ Heavy soiling of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels - the re-
increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load).
sult can be a vibration, which can cause premature wear of the steering.
CAUTION
■ Vehicle paint Removing ice and snow from the windows
■ Repair damaged areas as soon as possible.
■ Matt-painted parts should not be treated with polishes or hard waxes. Fig. 142
■ Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches. Installation location of the ice
■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides. scraper, removing the scraper
■ Plastic parts
■ Do not use paint polish.
■ Chromed and anodised parts
■ Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of surface scratches.
■ Films
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of film
damage.
■ Do not use dirty cloths or sponges for cleaning.
 Read and observe and on page 119 first.
■ Do not use a scraper or other means to remove ice and snow. Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir-
■ Do not polish the films rors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap. 
■ Do not use a high pressure cleaner on the films.

Care and maintenance 121


› Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow Vehicle compo-
Circumstances Remedy
» Fig. 142. nents
CAUTION Covers on electri-
Soiling Cleaners specifically for this purpose
■ Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to cally heated seats
the glass surface. Seat belts » Soiling soft cloth and mild soap solutiona)
■ Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand, a) Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface.
■ Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels WARNING
that have been fitted by the factory. ■ Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
Caring for the interior ■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.
 Read and observe and on page 119 first.

Vehicle compo- CAUTION


Circumstances Remedy ■ Natural leather / leather / Alcantara® / material
nents
■ Avoid standing for lengthy periods in bright sunlight, and protect the mate-
Dust, surface
Vacuum cleaner rials by covering to prevent them from fading.
soiling
■ Remove fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish and similar) as
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool soon as possible.
Soiling (fresh) cloth, if necessary, mild soap solutiona), ■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
then wipe off with a soft cloth that no water gets into the seams - risk of damaging the leather!
Natural leather / Stubborn stains Cleaning fluid specifically for this task ■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
Artificial leather / Treat the leather periodically with a of the panelling.
Alcantara® / Care (natural leather protecting fluid / use a care ■ Do not use leather cleaners, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar
Material leather) cream with light blocker and impregna- agents on Alcantara® seat upholstery.
tion after each cleaning ■ Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness - this could lead to clearly visible discolouration on the upholstery. This
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning
is not a defect in the fabric.
Care (Alcan- glove”.
■ Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can dam-
tara® / material) Remove pills from materials with a
age the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage will not be recognised
brush
as a justified complaint.
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, if ■ Plastic parts
Plastic parts Soiling necessary cleaners specifically for this ■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of damage to
purpose the dash panel.
Wash with clean water and dry with a ■ Windows
Windows Soiling
wipe specifically for that purpose ■ Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk
of damage. 

122 General Maintenance


■ Covers on electrically heated seats
■ Do not clean either with water or with other liquids - risk of damage to the
Inspecting and replenishing
heating system.
■ Do not dry by switching on the heating.
Fuel
■ Seat belts
■ After cleaning the belts, allow them to dry before retracting them.
 Introduction

Note Fig. 143


During vehicle use, some minor changes may become visible on the leather Stickers showing the prescribed
and Alcantara®(due to e.g. folds, discolouration). fuel

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:


Petrol and diesel refuelling 124
Unleaded petrol 124
Diesel fuel 125
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 143.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres, including a reserve of approx.
7 litres.

WARNING
The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - it can be fatal!

CAUTION
■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the
exhaust system.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
■ If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country other than the one for
which it was intended, please talk to a ŠKODA Partner. They will tell you
whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in that country
and/or whether the manufacturer will sanction operating the vehicle with an-
other fuel.

Inspecting and replenishing 123


Petrol and diesel refuelling Unleaded petrol
 Read and observe and on page 123 first.

The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 143 on page 123.
The vehicle can only operate with unleaded petrol that meets standard EN
2281) and contains maximum 10% bioethanol (E10).
Prescribed fuel 95 / min. 92 and 93 RON / ROZ
We recommend using petrol 95 RON.
Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly
Fig. 144 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on increased fuel consumption).
the fuel filler flap
In an emergency, petrol 91 RON can be used (slight power loss, slightly in-
 Read and observe and on page 123 first. creased fuel consumption)» .
Specified petrol is unleaded, min. 95 RON / RON
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
Use min. 95 RON petrol.
 The vehicle is unlocked.
 The ignition is switched off. In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 RON petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption)» .
› Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow
1 and fold in the direction of
arrow 2 » Fig. 144. Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / RON
› Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 . We recommend using petrol 98 RON.
› Remove the tank cap and place on top of the fuel filler flap in direction of ar- Optionally, petrol 95 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased
row 4 . fuel consumption).
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go. In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 RON petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
The fuel tank is full as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time. slightly increased fuel consumption)» .
Do not continue refuelling.
CAUTION
› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of dam-
pump.
age to the engine and to the exhaust system.
› Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc- ■ When petrol with a lower than the prescribed octane is used, only continue
tion to the arrow until it securely engages 3 .
driving at mid-range engine speeds and with minimal strain on the engine. Re-
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place. fuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. 

1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.

124 General Maintenance


■ Lower than 91 octane petrol should not be used, even in an emergency! Operating under different weather conditions
■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather conditions.
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en- Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corresponds
gine or switch on the ignition. to these conditions.

CAUTION CAUTION
Petrol additives (additives) The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of dam-
■ Unleaded petrol complying with the EN 228 standard1) meets all the condi- age to the engine and to the exhaust system.
tions for problem-free engine operation. We therefore do not recommend mix- ■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
ing fuel additives into the petrol - risk of engine damage or damage to the ex- tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the
haust system. ignition!
■ The following additives may not be used - risk of engine damage or damage ■ The biofuel RME must not be used!
to the exhaust system!
■ Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with CAUTION
manganese and iron content. Diesel fuel additives
■ Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol). ■ The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you do
Note not add any fuel additives to the diesel - there is a risk of engine damage or
■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the damage to the exhaust system.
engine can be used without limitations.
■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON does not result
Engine compartment
in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles
for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.  Introduction
■ On vehicles using the prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can lead to an increase in This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
power and reduction in fuel consumption. Opening and closing the bonnet 126
Engine compartment overview 127
Diesel fuel Windscreen washer fluid 127
 Read and observe and on page 123 first.
WARNING
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a cov-
» Fig. 143 on page 123. er) – risk of fire! 

The vehicle can only be operated using diesel fuel that complies with the
standard EN 5902) and contains a maximum 7% biodiesel (B7)3).

1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
2) In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
3) In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.

Inspecting and replenishing 125


WARNING CAUTION
When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must Only refill using fluids with the proper specification - risk of damage to the ve-
be observed - otherwise risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of hicle!
your car is a hazardous area!
Note
WARNING ■ Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Origi-
nal Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
■ We recommend you have the operating fluids replaced by a specialist garage.
■ Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY
system, open the driver's door.
■ Firmly apply the handbrake. Opening and closing the bonnet
■ For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
■ Allow the engine to cool.
■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has
stopped escaping.

WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment
■ Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may still turn suddenly
about 10 minutes after switching off the ignition!
■ Do not smoke in the vicinity of the engine and avoid the use of open
flames or sparks.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.
Fig. 145 Opening the bonnet

WARNING  Read and observe and on page 125 first.


Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning Open flap
■ If it is necessary to work on the engine with the engine running, beware › Ensure that the windscreen wipers are not raised away from the windscreen
of rotating engine parts and electrical plants - they can be fatal! - risk of damage to the bonnet.
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system. › Open the driver's door and pull the unlocking lever below the dashboard in
■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 145.
battery. › Press the release lever in the direction of arrow 2 and the bonnet will be
unlocked. 

126 General Maintenance


› Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow 3 . E Brake fluid reservoir 130
› Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow 4 from the holder. F Vehicle battery 131
› Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di-
rection of arrow 5 . Windscreen washer fluid
Close the flap
› Lift the bonnet. Fig. 147
› Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it. Windscreen washer fluid reser-
› Drop down the bonnet lid from a height of about 20 cm applying light pres- voir
sure until it clicks safely into place.
WARNING
■ Never drive with the bonnet lid not properly closed - risk of accident!
■ Make sure that when closing the bonnet, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
 Read and observe and on page 125 first.
Engine compartment overview
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir A is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 147.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3.5 litres or about 5.4 litres on vehicles
that have a headlight cleaning system1).
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid for the current or expected weather
conditions. We recommend that you use windscreen washer fluid from ŠKODA
Original Accessories.

CAUTION
■ If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use
windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re-

Fig. 146 Arrangement (example) in the engine compartment plenishing it with liquid - otherwise the liquid transportation system might be
contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction.
 Read and observe and on page 125 first.

A Coolant expansion reservoir 130


B Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 127
C Engine oil dipstick 129
D Engine oil filler opening 129

1) In some countries, 5.4 l. applies for both variants.

Inspecting and replenishing 127


Engine oil Diesel engines Specification
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR
 Introduction 1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR
VW 507 00

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:


Vehicles with fixed service intervals
Specification 128
Petrol engines Specification
Check and refill 129
1.2 l/66, 81 kW TSI
The engine has been filled ex-factory with a high-grade oil that can be used 1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI VW 502 00
throughout the year (except in extreme climate zones).
1.6 l./81 kW MPI
We recommend that the oil changes be carried out by a ŠKODA Service Part-
ner. Diesel engines Specification
The engine oil should be changed at specified service intervals » page 117. 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR
VW 507 00
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR
The engine uses up some oil, depending on driving style and operating condi-
tions (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this dur- Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
ing the first 5 000 km.
CAUTION
WARNING ■If no prescribed engine oil is available, then max. 0.5 l oil of the following
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on specifications can be refilled.
the engine compartment » page 125. ■ Petrol engines: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN, (API SM);
■ Diesel engines: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
CAUTION
Do not add any additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.

Note
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Specification
 Read and observe and on page 128 first.

The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated sep-
arately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
Vehicles with variable service intervals
Petrol engines Specification
1.2 l/66, 81 kW TSI
VW 504 00
1.4 l/92 kW TSI

128 General Maintenance


Check and refill Note
Too low engine oil level is shown in the instrument cluster by the warning light
 illuminating and also indicated by the message » page 35. Nevertheless, we
recommend checking the oil level on a regular basis using the dipstick.

Coolant

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Checking and refilling 130
Fig. 148 Dipstick variants The coolant helps to keep the engine temperature down, and consists of wa-
ter and coolant additive (with additives that protect the cooling system against
 Read and observe and on page 128 first. corrosion and prevent furring).
Check and refill oil under the following conditions. The proportion of coolant additive in the coolant must be 40 to 60 %.
 The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface. The correct mix of water and coolant additive should be checked and if neces-
 The engine operating temperature is reached. sary corrected by a specialist garage.
 The engine is turned off.
WARNING
Checking the level ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
› Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough. the engine compartment » page 125.
› Pull the dipstick out and wipe with a clean cloth. ■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
› Push the dipstick back to the stop and then pull it out again. engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurised - risk of scalding or
› Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in. injury from splashes of coolant!
The oil level must lie in range A » Fig. 148. If the oil level is below range A , oil ■ To protect against the coolant splashing, cover the cap with a cloth when
must be added. opening.
■ Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant. If
Refilling the coolant comes into contact with the eye or skin, wash the affected area
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening D » Fig. 146 on page 127. with plenty of water for several minutes, and where appropriate seek medi-
› Add oil of the correct specification in portions of 0.5 litres» page 128. cal help.
› Check the oil level.
› Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully. CAUTION
CAUTION Do not cover the radiator and install any parts (e.g auxiliary lights.) in front of
■ The oil level must never be below range A » Fig. 148 – risk of damage to the the air intakes - risk of the engine overheating.
engine as well as to the exhaust system.
■ If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range A , do not
continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.

Inspecting and replenishing 129


Checking and refilling CAUTION
■ If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
Fig. 149 aerate - risk of engine damage!  Stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek
Coolant expansion reservoir assistance from a specialist garage.
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » Fig. 149. The coolant could, when
heated, be expelled from the cooling system - risk of damage to the engine
parts.
■ If it is not possible to add coolant,  do not continue driving! Switch off the
engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification can
reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - risk of damage to the
cooling system and the engine.
 Read and observe and on page 129 first. ■ If non-distilled (non-demineralised) water has been used to top up, the cool-
ant should be replaced by a specialist garage - risk of engine damage.
Check and refill coolant under the following conditions. ■ A loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling system - risk of engine dam-
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface. age. Top up with coolant and then seek assistance from a specialist garage.
 The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm the result of the check may
be wrong). Note
 The engine is turned off. Too low coolant level is indicated in the instrument cluster by the warning
light  and shown by the message » page 35. We still recommend inspecting
Check the coolant level - the coolant level must lie between the marks A and the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
B » Fig. 149. If the coolant level is below the mark B , top up with coolant.

Refilling Brake fluid


The reservoir must always contain a small amount of coolant » .
› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the Fig. 150
cap carefully. Brake fluid reservoir
› Always top up using coolant of the correct specification.
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification for the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir
» Fig. 149.
If the specified coolant is not available, then refilling only with distilled or dem-
ineralised water, and get a specialist garage to correct the water-coolant addi-
tive mix as soon as possible. Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
 The engine is turned off.
Check brake fluid level - the brake fluid level must lie between the markings
“MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 150. 

130 General Maintenance


Specification - the brake fluid must comply with the standard VW 501 14 (this Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4). Symbol Meaning
WARNING
■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
 Always wear eye protection.

the engine compartment » page 125. Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
■ If the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below  tection.
the “MIN” » Fig. 150mark, this may be an indication of a leak in the brake Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
system.  Stop driving - There is a risk of an accident! Seek help from a  vehicle battery.
specialist garage. When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
 is produced.
Note
■ The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.  Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
■ Too low brake fluid level is indicated by the warning light  being shown on
the display of the instrument cluster as well as the corresponding message WARNING
» page 30. We still recommend inspecting the brake fluid level in the reservoir Battery acid is highly corrosive - it can cause injury, chemical burns or poi-
from time to time. soning! Corrosive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory
tract and the eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
Vehicle battery
the vehicle battery.
 Introduction ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Get
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: medical assistance without delay.
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
Check condition 132
pendent (e.g. children).
Charging 132 ■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
Disconnect/reconnect and change 133 battery vent openings.
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
the supply of electrical consumers in the car. WARNING
Working on the car battery may cause explosion, fire, injury or chemical
Depending on the engine, the vehicle battery is either in the engine compart- burn! The following guidelines must be observed.
ment or the luggage compartment. ■ Do not smoke, use open flames or light or transmitting devices.
Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge protection ■ A discharged vehicle battery may freeze slightly. Never charge up a fro-
The on-board power supply system tries to prevent the vehicle battery from zen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
discharging in the following ways when it is subject to heavy loading. ■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery.
▶ By increasing the engine idle speed. ■ Do not connect the battery terminals, bridging the two poles will cause a
▶ Through the power limitation of certain consumers. short circuit. 
▶ By switching off some consumers (heated seats, heated rear window) for as
long as necessary.

Inspecting and replenishing 131


CAUTION Battery discharge
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk If frequent short journeys are made, the vehicle battery does not recharge suf-
of damage to the paintwork. ficiently.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
Note
■ We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe- If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, disconnect the negative
cialist garage. terminal  of the battery or charge the battery constantly with a very low
■ You should replace batteries older than 5 years. charging current.

Check condition Charging


 Read and observe and on page 131 first.

Only charge the battery when the ignition and all consumers are switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
› For vehicles with the START-STOPP system or auxiliary heater, clamp the 
terminal of the charger on the  pole of the battery, the  terminal of the
charger on the earth point of the engine» page 145.
› For vehicles without the START-STOPP system or auxiliary heater, clamp the
terminals of the charger on the associated battery poles ( on ,  on ).
Fig. 151 Vehicle battery: Open the cover / acid level indicator
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
 Read and observe and on page 131 first.
› After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the mains cable from the power socket.
inspection. › Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
Check the acid level A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
For car batteries with acid level indicator, acidity can be checked on the basis er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
of a colour display. In vehicle batteries with the label “AGM” there is no acid WARNING
level examination.
■ When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo-
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle battery may be provided with a cov- sion. An explosion can be caused through sparking while unclamping or
er, this can be opened in the direction of arrow » Fig. 151 - . loosening the cable plug.
■ So-called“quick-charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and re-
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. Therefore, carefully knock
on the display » Fig. 151 - . quires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have “Quick
loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
Black colour – electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.

132 General Maintenance


Disconnect/reconnect and change Wheels
 Read and observe and on page 131 first.
Wheels and tyres
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
size as the original battery.  Introduction
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› To disconnect, switch off the ignition and disconnect the negative terminal Advice on tyre/wheel usage 133
first , then disconnect the positive terminal. Tyre pressure 134
› To reconnect, reconnect the positive terminal first, then reconnect the Tyre wear and wheel change 135
negative terminal . Spare wheel 135
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func- Spare wheel 135
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative. Tyre marking 136

Function / device Commissioning Advice on tyre/wheel usage


Electric windows » page 53
During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip; appropriate care
Time settings » page 38
should therefore be taken when driving.
CAUTION Tyres with the deeper profiles should always be fitted to the front wheels.
■ Disconnect the battery only with the ignition and consumers turned off - risk Rims and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle. ommend that you use rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■ Before disconnecting the battery, always close all the electric windows -
there is a risk of malfunction. Wheels and tyres should always be stored in a cool, dry and dark place. The
■ Under no circumstances mix up the charging cables – risk of fire. tyres themselves should be stored vertically.

Note Tyre life


Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
After disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery, we recommend hav-
used. We recommend that you do not use tyres that are more than 6 years old.
ing the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality of
the vehicle is guaranteed. The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the in-
side). For example, DOT ... 10 16... means, for example, that the tyre was manu-
factured in the 10. week of 2016.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre’s profile immediately (e.g. small stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed and help should be sought from a specialist garage. 

Wheels 133
Fitting new tyres Tyre pressure
Only fit approved radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and
the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
Unidirectional tyres
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
tyre.
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the fol-
lowing tyre characteristics may be degraded.
▶ Driving stability.
▶ Traction.
▶ Tyre noise and tyre wear. Fig. 152 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
WARNING
■ Never use tyres if you do not know anything about their condition and The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms A » Fig. 152 (for
age - risk of accidents. some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
■ Never drive with damaged tyres – there is the risk of an accident occur- Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
ring. B Inflation pressure for half load
C Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
CAUTION fuel consumption and emissions)
■ The tyres must be protected from contact with substances (e.g. oil, grease D Inflation pressure for full load
and fuel) which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with these E Tyre diameter in inches
substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a specialist This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre pres-
workshop. sure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in the
■ Do not use rims with ground or polished surfaces in winter conditions - there
vehicle's technical documentation, in the declaration of conformity (in so-
is a risk of rim damage (e.g through salt spreading). called COC document) and listed on the vehicle data » page 160.
Note F Tyre pressure value on the front axle
■ We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe- G Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
cialist garage. Check tyre pressures
■ We recommend that you use tyres, snow chains and full wheel trims from
Check the tyre pressure (including that of the emergency or spare wheel) at
ŠKODA Original Accessories. least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure on warm tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 106. 

134 General Maintenance


WARNING WARNING
■Do not drive with incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident. ■ Change the tyres at the latest when they are worn down to the wear indi-
■In the event of very rapid pressure loss (e.g. in the event of tyre damage) cators - risk of accident.
an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without ■ Faulty wheel alignment affects handling - risk of accident.
sudden steering movements and without any hard braking - risk of acci- ■ Unusual vibrations or the vehicle “pulling ” to one side could be a sign of
dent. tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If there are no external signs of tyre
damage, seek the help of a specialist garage.
Note
The declaration of conformity (COC document), can be obtained from a ŠKODA1) Spare wheel
partner.
The size of the spare wheel is identical to that of the vehicle factory installed
Tyre wear and wheel change wheels.
After changing the spare wheel, the tyre pressure should be adjusted.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 106.

WARNING
■ If, you get a puncture and a spare tyre has to be mounted with opposite
direction of rotation, then drive carefully. The best properties of the tyre
are no longer present in this situation.
■ If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted
to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used
Fig. 153 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of
driving is adopted.
Tyre wear increases in the following circumstances.
▶ Incorrect tyre pressures.
▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / braking). Spare wheel
▶ Incorrect wheel balancing (you should have the wheels balanced after
Only use this emergency spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage, as
changing/repair tyres or if the steering “is drifting”). it is not intended for permanent use.
▶ Wheel alignment errors.
A warning label is always placed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.
There are wear indicator markersin the tyre profiles, indicating whether the
minimum permissible tread depth has been reached» Fig. 153 - . A tyre Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
▶ Do not cover the warning sign.
should be regarded as worn out when this indicator is flush with the tread.
▶ Be particularly observant when driving.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI” and/or other sym-
▶ Inflate the temporary spare wheel to the maximum inflation pressure for the
bols (e.g. ), identify the position of the wear indicators.
vehicle » page 134 (the prescribed tyre pressure of the spare wheel 125/70
To ensure uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the R16 is 4.2 bar). 
wheels every 10 000 km, in line with the schedule» Fig. 153 - .

1) Only valid for some countries and some models.

Wheels 135
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the WARNING
system » page 106. Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – risk of accident.
WARNING
■ Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted!
■ Avoid full throttle acceleration, sharp braking and fast cornering when Operating in winter conditions
driving with the temporary spare wheel.
■ Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel. All-year (or “winter”) tyres
■ Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare
wheel. All-year or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake
symbol ) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions.
To get the best possible driving characteristics, all-year or “winter”tyres, with a
Tyre marking
minimum tread depth of 4 mm on all four wheels, should be fitted.
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 185/60 R 15 84 H If “winter” tyres are fitted, summer tyres should be fitted again in good time as
they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre
185 Tyre width in mm noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well
60 Height/width ratio in % as at temperatures above 7 °C.
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
Speed symbol
15 Diameter of wheel in inches All-year or “winter”tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol ) of
84 Load index a lower speed category than listed in the vehicle’s technical documentation
H Speed symbol can be used provided that the maximum permissible speed for these tyres is
not exceeded even if the maximum possible speed of the vehicle is higher.
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre
For vehicles with Infotainment, use the  button to adjust the speed limit for
Load index all-year or “winter” tyres » Owner´s Manual - Infotainment. For other vehicles,
83 84 85 86 87 88
there is the possibility to set the speed limit for winter tyres at a specialist ga-
Load rage.
487 500 515 530 545 560
(In kg) the vehicle has all-season or “winter” tyres with a speed category that is lower
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fitted than the specified top speed of the vehicle (does not apply to factory-supplied
with tyres in a given category tyres), a warning label with the maximum value of the speed category supplied
for the mounted tyres in the interior of the vehicle and in a place which is con-
Speed stantly visible in the driver’s field of vision. The warning label (sticker) can be
S T U H V W
symbol replaced by setting the maximum value of the speed category supplied for the
Maximum mounted tyres in Infotainment1). This specification defines the maximum vehi-
speed 180 190 200 210 240 270 cle speed with mounted all-season or “winter”tires that must not be exceeded.
(in km/h)

1) Valid in certain countries.

136 General Maintenance


Snow chains
The snow chains improve handling in wintry road conditions.
Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains » page 141.
Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to
the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
5J x 14 35 mm 175/70 R14
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6J x 15 38 mm 185/60 R15
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.

WARNING
Do not use chains on snow and ice-free routes - the handling would be im-
paired and there is a risk of damage to the tyres.

Wheels 137
WARNING
Do-it-yourself
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle - there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment Location of reflective vest
 Introduction
Fig. 155
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Storage compartment for the re-
flective vest
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle 138
Location of reflective vest 138
fire extinguisher 138
Vehicle tool kit 139

Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle


The reflective vest can be stored in a bracket under the driver's seat » Fig. 155.
Fig. 154
Placing of the first-aid kit and fire extinguisher
the warning triangle
Fig. 156
Release the fire extinguisher

The following information is for the first aid kit and warning triangle from the
ŠKODA Original accessories valid.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid kit can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the lug- The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driv-
gage compartment » Fig. 154. er's seat.
Placing of the warning triangle › To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts
The warning triangle can be inserted into the recess under the loading edge in the direction of arrow » Fig. 156 and remove the fire extinguisher.
and secured with the fastener tape » Fig. 154. › To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
› To release, press the clasp on the tape in the direction of arrow 1 , fold open
the belt A in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 154. The Owner´s Manual is located next to the fire extinguisher.
› To secure, fold up the beltA against the arrow direction 2 until it locks in- Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date,
to place. the correct function of the device is not guaranteed. 

138 Do-it-yourself
WARNING WARNING
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher - there is a risk of injury in the ■ The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with it –
there is a risk of injury.
■ Always stow the tool safely in the box and make sure that it is attached
Vehicle tool kit with the belt to the spare wheel - otherwise it could cause injury to the oc-
cupants if breaking suddenly or colliding with another vehicle.

CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box -
risk of damage to the box.

Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.

Changing a wheel

Preliminary work

Fig. 157 Vehicle tool kit For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
changing a wheel on the road.
The box with the tool kit is located in the storage compartment for the spare › Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
wheel and may be secured with tape, depending on specification. with a flat and firm surface.
Depending on the equipment, not all the components listed in the on-board
› Switch off the engine.
tool kit have to be contained in it.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear.
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
1 Screwdriver position.
2 Spanner for removing and installing the tail light › Firmly apply the handbrake.
3 Top section for the anti-theft wheel bolts › Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
4 Towing eyelet prescribed distance.
5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims › Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road while the wheel is being changed (they should remain behind a crash
6 Jack with sign
barrier, for instance).
7 Wheel wrench › Uncouple any trailers.
8 Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
9 Breakdown kit Changing a wheel
› Take out the emergency or spare wheel » page 140.
› Remove the full wheel trim » page 141 or caps » page 141.
› Loosen the wheel bolts » page 142 » . 

Emergency equipment and self-help 139


› Jack up the vehicle» page 142 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of WARNING
the ground. Tightening torque which is too high can damage the threads and this can
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper, result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. Where
etc.). tightening torque is too low, the wheels may become loose while driving -
› Remove the wheel carefully. risk of accident. Therefore drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed
› Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts. until the tightening torque has been checked.
› Lower the vehicle.
› Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“pull-
ing crossways”)» page 142. Removing/stowing the emergency or spare wheel
› Replace the wheel trim » page 141 and caps » page 141.
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is cor- Fig. 158
rect » page 134. Take out the wheel

All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If screws are corroded and diffi-
cult to move, these must be replaced.

WARNING
■ Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn), provided the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come loose and fall
off – risk of injury.
■ Under no circumstances must the bolts be greased or oiled - could cause The wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
an accident. ment and is fixed in place with a screw.
Take out the wheel
Subsequent steps › Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
› Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out. › Unscrew the nut in the direction of arrow » Fig. 158 and take out the wheel.
› Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage Stow the wheel
compartment and secure it with a nut. › Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
› Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band. On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot, lay down the wheel with the
› Check tyre pressure on the fitted wheel and adjust if necessary and, with ve- outer face upward.
hicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 106. › Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible. › Screw the nut in the opposite direction to the arrow until it stops » Fig. 158.
The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm. › Place the box with the tool kit back inside the wheel and secure it with the
tape.
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op-
tions.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.

140 Do-it-yourself
Full wheel trim › To remove the cap, insert the extraction pliers as far as they will go on the
cap and pull them out in the direction of arrow » Fig. 159.
Remove trim › To install, insert the cap onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go.
› Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims on the edge of the full
wheel trim. Anti-theft wheel bolts
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim. Fig. 160
Install trim Anti-theft wheel bolt and attach-
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening. ment
› Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is indicated by means of a symbol on
the back of the wheel trim supplied ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories. If using the anti-theft wheel bolt, it should be fitted at this point
» .
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. This can only be
WARNING » Fig. 160 loosened / tightenedwith attachment B .
If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order › Insert the attachment B » Fig. 160 as far as it will go on the anti-theft wheel
to cool the brake system - otherwise risk of accident. bolt A .
› Insert the key as far as it will go onto attachment B and loosen / tighten the
CAUTION wheel bolt.
■ If the wheel trim is positioned outside the position marked for the anti-theft › Remove the attachment.
wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel cover. The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the ve-
■ Only use manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – there is a risk
hicle in case of a possible wheel change.
of damaging the trim.
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
Note anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories. the wheel trim» page 141.

Note
Wheel bolts
The attachment and the anti-theft wheel bolts are provided with a code num-
ber. A replacement attachment can be ordered from ŠKODA Genuine Accesso-
Fig. 159 ries using this.
Remove the cap

Emergency equipment and self-help 141


Loosening/tightening wheel bolts

Fig. 161
Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 163 Attach lifting jack

› Insert the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated Before the vehicle is raised, please take note of the safety instructions » .
attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 160 on page 141.
› To loosen the screws, grasp the key end and turn the screw about one turn In order to raise the vehicle, the jack from the tool kit is to be used. Position
the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre.
rotation in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 161.
› Totighten the screws, grasp the key end and turn the screw about against The jacking points are located on the lower sill » Fig. 162.
the direction of the arrow » Fig. 161, until it is tight.
› Position the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
WARNING and ensure that the jack will fit in the jacking point when raised » Fig. 163 -
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of .
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and › Use the crank to raise the jack until its pawl covers the jacking
make sure you keep your footing - danger of injury. point» Fig. 163- .
› Raise the vehicle until the wheel is a little off the floor.
Raising the vehicle WARNING
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is risk of in-
Fig. 162 jury.
■ Ensure the vehicle cannot unexpectedly roll away.
Jacking points for the jack
■ Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
■ Place a wide and stable base material under the jack if on a loose surfa-
ces (e.g. gravel).
■ Place an anti-slip base material (e.g. a rubber mat) under the jack if on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts (e.g. arms or legs) under the vehicle while
the vehicle is raised.
■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.

CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly positioned against the bar of
the lower beam - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.

142 Do-it-yourself
Breakdown kit Description of the breakdown kit

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description of the breakdown kit 143
Preparing to use the breakdown kit 144
Sealing and inflating tyres 144
Information on driving with repaired tyres 144
The following information applies for the breakdown kit supplied ex-factory.
The breakdown kit can be used to seal punctures with a diameter of up to
about 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma-
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga-
Fig. 164 Description of the breakdown kit
rage.
Replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit as soon as possi-  Read and observe on page 143 first.
ble, or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails). ment.
Do not use the breakdown kit in the following cases. 1 Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
▶ The rim is damaged.
2 Valve remover
▶ The outside temperature is below -20 ° C.
▶ Tyre punctures greater than 4 mm. 3 Inflation hose with plug
▶ Damage to the tyre wall. 4 Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
▶ The use-by date (see inflation bottle) has passed. the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
5 Button for the tyre pressure reduction
WARNING 6 12 volt cable connector
■ If there is skin contact with the sealant wash the affected area immedi-
7 Tyre inflation hose
ately.
8 Tyre inflation pressure indicator
■ Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
9 ON and OFF switch
10 Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
11 Replacement valve core

Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.

Emergency equipment and self-help 143


Preparing to use the breakdown kit › For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
 Read and observe on page 143 first. position.
› Start the engine.
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before › Plug the connector 6 into the 12-volt socket » page 70.
undertaking a wheel repair on a road. › Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 9 .
› Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place › Once tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has been reached, turn off the air
with a flat and firm surface. compressor. Maximum run time of 6 minutes » .
› Switch off the engine. › If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
› For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear. hose 7 from the tyre valve.
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P › Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
position. to “distribute” in the tyre.
› Firmly apply the handbrake. › Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 7 back onto the tyre valve and repeat
› Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the the inflation process.
prescribed distance. › Stick the sticker 1 » Fig. 164 on page 143 on the dashboard in the driver's
› Have all the occupants get out. While the repair is being carried out, the pas- field of view.
sengers should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a
crash barrier, for instance). At a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, the journey can be continued at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph.
› Uncouple any trailers.
WARNING
Sealing and inflating tyres ■ If the tire does not inflate at least. 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
 Read and observe on page 143 first. sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre.  Do not drive the vehicle.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Sealing ■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
› Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre. ing inflated – there is a risk of burning.
› Insert the valve remover 2 » Fig. 164 on page 143 on the valve insert, so that
the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover. CAUTION
› Unscrew the valve insert and place it on a clean base (rag, paper etc.). Switch off the air compressor if it has been running for as long as 6 minutes –
› Forcefully shake bottle 10 » Fig. 164 on page 143 several times. risk of damage to the compressor! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
› Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflater bottle 10 . The film on nutes before switching it on again.
the bottle cap is pierced.
› Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and insert the bottle onto the Information on driving with repaired tyres
tyre valve.
› Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing  Read and observe on page 143 first.
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
› Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve. The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
› Screw in the valve insert with the valve remover 2 . minutes.

Inflating If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less


› Screw the tyre inflation hose 7 » Fig. 164 on page 143 firmly onto the tyre › The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit.  Do not contin-
valve. ue to drive! Seek help from a specialist garage. 

144 Do-it-yourself
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
› Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 134.
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.

Jump-starting Fig. 165 Start assistance: - Discharged battery, -power-supplying


battery / ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle 145
WARNING
■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 125.
■ When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
served » page 131.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat-
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion and injury! Fig. 166 Positive terminal on vehicles with the vehicle battery in the lug-
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low gage compartment
– risk of explosion and caustic burns!
 Read and observe on page 145 first.

If, because of a discharged battery, it is not possible to start the engine, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. To do this, jump-
start cables are required which have a sufficiently large cross-section and in-
sulated terminal clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the
power-supplying battery must not be significantly lower than the capacity of
the discharged battery.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
› Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
› Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the power-supplying battery. 

Emergency equipment and self-help 145


› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the power-supplying battery. Towing the vehicle
› For vehicles with the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp 4 to the earth point
of the engine A » Fig. 165. Information about the towing process
› For vehicles without the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp 4 to a solid
metal part firmly attached to the engine block or directly to the engine block.
Installation location of the positive terminal and the earth point in vehicles
with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment
The positive terminal B is located under a cover in the engine compartment
» Fig. 166.
› Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
of arrow 1 and remove the cover in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Clamp the positive terminal of the jumper cable to the position B » Fig. 166.
› Clamp the negative terminal of the jumper cable to the earthing point of the
engine A or on a metal part firmly connected to the engine block or directly Fig. 167 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
on the engine block.
To tow with a tow rope, only use a braided synthetic fibre rope » Fig. 167 - 
Starting engine » .
› Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
› Initiate the starting process in the vehicle with the discharged battery. Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes at the front
› If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure » page 147, towing eyes at the rear » page 147 or to the towing device of
and repeat after half a minute. the trailer device » page 108.
› Remove the jump start cables in the reverse order as attachment. Conditions for towing.
WARNING  Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels
■ Never clamp the jump cable to the negative terminal of the discharged
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
battery - risk of explosion.  If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
other – there is a risk of short circuit.  The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery  The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle if it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the way described or if the towing
– there is a risk of short circuit. distance is greater than 50 km.
■ Position the jump cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts
in the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle dam- Driver of the tow vehicle
age. › On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
› Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut.
Driver of the towed vehicle
› If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. The brake
booster and power steering only operate if the engine is running, otherwise
much greater force has to be applied to the brake pedal and more power has
to be expended for steering. 

146 Do-it-yourself
› If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the Removing/installing the towing eye
steering wheel does not lock and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen › To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used. 3 » Fig. 168 until it clicks into place» .
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
› Keep the tow rope taut at all times during the towing procedure. through the eye.
WARNING › To remove, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow 3.
■ Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 167- , the towing
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - risk of accident. WARNING
■ The tow rope should not be twisted - there is a risk of accidents. The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye
could break whilst being towed.
CAUTION
■ Do not tow-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine! The battery from Towing eye rear
another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 145, Jump-starting.
■ For off-road towing manoeuvres, there is a risk to both vehicles that the fas-
Fig. 169
teners may become overloaded and damaged. Rear towing eye
Note
We recommend that you use a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Front towing eye

The rear towing eye is located below the bumper on the right.
Remove the protective cap before using the towing eye. » Fig. 169. After using
the towing eye, the protective cap can be used again.
Vehicles with a trailer device
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the pre-installed detachable
tow-bar may be used » page 108, Hitch.

Fig. 168 Remove cap / install towing eye

Cap removal/fitting
› To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow 1 and remove it
in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 168.
› To fit, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite edge
of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.

Emergency equipment and self-help 147


Remote - change battery Unlock the boot lid 149
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 149

Unlocking/locking the driver's door

Fig. 171
Handle on the driver's door:
Open lock cover

Fig. 170 Remove cover/take out battery

› Pop out the key bit. The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the
› Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 170 with your thumb or by using a flat
key via the lock cylinder.
screwdriver in region B .
› Open the battery in the direction of arrow 1 . › Pull on the door handle and hold.
› Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 2 and install a new › Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
battery. cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 171.
› Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place. › Release the door handle.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked › Insert the vehicle key bit into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
with the key after replacing the battery » page 49. › Pull on the door handle and hold.
› Replace the cover.
CAUTION CAUTION
■ The replacement battery must correspond to the original specification. Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery. ing/unlocking.
Note
■ We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
■ If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.

Emergency unlocking / unlocking of doors

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking the driver's door 148
Locking the door without locking cylinders 149

148 Do-it-yourself
Locking the door without locking cylinders Selector lever-emergency unlocking

Fig. 172 Emergency locking: Left/right rear door Fig. 174 Remove / release the selector lever

› Open the corresponding back door remove the trim A » Fig. 172. › Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (spring-loa- › With one hand on the edge of the cover, push in direction of arrow 1
ded position). » Fig. 174.
› Replace the cover A . › At the same time lift the cover on the selector lever gaiter with the other
hand in direction of arrow 2 .
After closing, the door is locked.
› Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow 3 , simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in posi-
Unlock the boot lid tion N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
Fig. 173
Unlocking the door CAUTION
Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the
shift lever environment.

Replacing windscreen wiper blades

 Introduction
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside the vehicle. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess in the trim » Fig. 173 as far Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 150
as the stop. Replacing the rear window wiper blade 150
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow. WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons.

Emergency equipment and self-help 149


Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it
locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
Fig. 175 › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Setting the service position for › Turn on the ignition and press the lever in the direction of the arrow
the wiper arms » Fig. 175.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 177 Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 176 Changing the front windscreen wiper blade  Read and observe on page 149 first.

Removing the wiper blade


 Read and observe on page 149 first. › Lift the wiper arm » page 150 from the window in the direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 177.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blades, close the bonnet and put the
windscreen wiper arms into the service position. › Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow
Setting the service position 2.
› Switch the ignition on and off again. › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 175 within 10 seconds and hold Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
for approximately 2 seconds.
› Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it
Removing the wiper blade locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of 1 » Fig. 176. › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow
2.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3.

150 Do-it-yourself
Fuses and light bulbs Fuses in the dashboard

Fuses Fig. 179


Remove the fuse box cover.
 Introduction

Fig. 178
Blown fuse

 Read and observe and on page 151 first.

The fuses are located on the bottom of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Fuses in the dashboard 151 › Remove the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 179 in the direction of the arrow.
Fuse arrangement in the dashboard 152 › Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover.
Fuses in the engine compartment 153 › Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment 154
› Replace the bracket at the original position.
› Insert the top edge of the cover into the dash panel first.
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa- › Push the lower edge of the cover in the region A .
ble from the melted-through metal strip » Fig. 178.

WARNING
Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work in
the engine compartment » page 125, Engine compartment.

CAUTION
■ Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
■ If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
■ “Do not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger fuses - dan-
ger of fire and damage to another electrical system.

Note
■We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
■There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
may exist for a single power consuming device.

Fuses and light bulbs 151


Fuse arrangement in the dashboard No. Power consumer
Air conditioning, automatic gearbox, diagnostic connector, heated
15
windscreen
16 Instrument cluster, emergency call
17 Anti-theft alarm, horn
18 Rear seat heating
19 Not assigned
20 Not assigned
21 Not assigned
Front and rear window washer system (without KESSY or without
Fig. 180 Fuses: LHD / RHD 22
heated windscreen)
23 Heated front seats
 Read and observe and on page 151 first.
Blower fan for air conditioning system, heating, air conditioning,
24
No. Power consumer heating
1 Light - left 25 Not assigned
Central locking, front and rear window washer system (only with 26 Heated front seats
2
KESSY or heated windscreen) 27 Rear window wiper
3 Ignition 28 Not assigned
4 Light - right 29 Airbag
5 Power windows - driver Electric windows, reverse light switches, air conditioning system,
6 Interior lighting 30 Park Assist, exterior mirror surface settings, power feed for centre
button strip, power feed for side button strip, interior mirror
7 Horn
Fuel pump, radiator fan, cruise control, front and rear window wash-
8 Towing hitch - left light 31
er, light switch
Operating lever beneath the steering wheel, engine control unit (on-
Diagnostic connector, beam range adjustment, control lever under
ly without KESSY), automatic gearbox (only without KESSY), auto-
32 the steering wheel, interior lighting, voltage stabiliser for taxi vehi-
9 matic gearbox (only without KESSY), ESC (only without KESSY), tow-
cles
ing equipment (only without KESSY), power steering (only without
KESSY) 33 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch
10 Power windows - rear left 34 Heated windscreen washer jets
11 Headlight cleaning system 35 Not assigned
12 Infotainment display 36 Not assigned
13 Multifunction unit for taxi vehicles 37 Radar
Operating lever under the steering wheel, light switch, ignition key 38 Not assigned
14 removal lock (automatic gearbox), headlight flasher, SmartGate, rain 39 Electrical auxiliary heating system
sensor, rear view camera 40 Not assigned 

152 Do-it-yourself
No. Power consumer
41 Rear window heater
42 Power windows - front passenger
43 Trailer device - electrical outlet
Cigarette lighter, 12-volt outlet in the interior, 12-volt power socket
44
in the luggage compartment
45 Power windows - rear right
Front and rear window washer, operating lever under the steering
46
wheel Fig. 182 Cover for the fuse box - variant 2
47 Trailer device - electrical outlet
48 Towing hitch - right light  Read and observe and on page 151 first.
49 Fuel pump
Replacing fuses
50 Infotainment › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
51 Heating of the external mirror › Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
52 KESSY of arrow 1 » Fig. 181 or » Fig. 182 and remove the cover in the direction of
arrow 2 .
53 Steering lock (KESSY)
› Remove the plastic clip from the holder on the cover of the fuse box in the
54 ABS or ESC dashboard.
55 Not assigned › Replace the defective fuse.
56 Not assigned › Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
57 Not assigned › Replace the bracket at the original position.
58 Rear seat heating CAUTION
59 Not assigned The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be inserted
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
Fuses in the engine compartment of damage to the vehicle!

Fig. 181 Cover for the fuse box - variant 1

Fuses and light bulbs 153


Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment No. Power consumer
19 Lambda probe
Fig. 183 20 Glow plug system, crankcase ventilation heater
Fuses
Bulbs

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Bulb arrangement in the front headlights 155
Replacing the bulb for the low beam (Halogen headlights) 155
 Read and observe and on page 151 first.
Changing the bulb for main beam, separate daytime running lights, and
parking light 155
No. Power consumer
Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light 156
1 Radiator fan Replacing light bulbs for fog lights 157
2 Glow plug system Changing the bulb for the licence plate light 157
3 ABS or ESC Removing/inserting the taillight 158
4 Additional electrical heating, heated windscreen Replacing the bulbs in the taillight assembly 158
5 Additional electrical heating, heated windscreen We recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other
6 Automatic gearbox expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
7 Engine control system ▶ Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
8 Windscreen wipers ▶ Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
9 Battery data module tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
10 ABS or ESC We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
11 Not assigned after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
12 Injectors, valve for fuel metering, control valve for fuel pressure In the case of failure of a Xenon gas discharge bulb or an LED diode, visit a
specialist garage.
13 Brake pedal switch
14 Fuel pump, radiator fan, cooling pump, pump for intercooling WARNING
15 Engine control system, voltage stabiliser for taxi vehicles ■ Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work
16 Starter in the engine compartment » page 125.
■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
17 Engine control system
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul-
Additional electric heater, valve for intake manifold, supercharger reg- ty by other road users. 
18 ulator, oil temperature, valve for activated charcoal filter, valve for oil
pressure control

154 Do-it-yourself
WARNING (Continued) Replacing the bulb for the low beam (Halogen headlights)
■ H7 and H15 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
■ Do not carry out any work on the Xenon gas discharge lamps - risk of
death!

CAUTION
■ Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
■ The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
Fig. 185 Changing the bulb for the low beam
light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
damage to the headlights.  Read and observe and on page 154 first.
Note
› Remove the protective cap A » Fig. 184 on page 155.
■ This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos-
› Remove the socket with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of arrow
sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other 1 » Fig. 185.
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage. › Remove the connector.
■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve-
› Insert the connector with the new bulb in the direction of arrow 2 so that
hicle. the fixing lug A fits the bulb into the recess on the reflector.
› Attach the connector.
Bulb arrangement in the front headlights › Fit the protective cap A » Fig. 184 on page 155.
Fig. 184 Changing the bulb for main beam, separate daytime running
Left headlight lights, and parking light

Fig. 186
Replacing the bulb for main
beam and separate daytime run-
ning lights 

 Read and observe and on page 154 first.

Bulb arrangement » Fig. 184


A Low beam or low beam with Xenon gas discharge bulb
B Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
C Turn signal light (at the front)

Fuses and light bulbs 155


Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light

Fig. 188
Changing the bulb for the front
turn signal light

Fig. 187 Change the light bulb for the parking light

 Read and observe and on page 154 first.  Read and observe and on page 154 first.

Removing/inserting the bulb for main beam and separate daytime running › Turn the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 188.
lights › Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the protective cap B » Fig. 184 on page 155. › Change the bulb in the socket.
› Pull the holder until it stops in the arrow direction 1 » Fig. 186. › Insert the socket with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
› Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 . tion to the arrow 2 .
› Change the bulb in the socket. › Turn the socket with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow 1
› Insert the socket with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc- until it stops.
tion to the arrow 2 .
› Turn the socket with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow 1
until it stops.
› Fit protective cap B » Fig. 184 on page 155 Insert.
Removing/inserting the bulb for the parking light
› Remove the protective cap B » Fig. 184 on page 155.
› Remove the bulb holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the
arrow 1 » Fig. 187.
› Hold the pedestal with the bulb in the region A .
› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder up to the stop.
› Replace the bulb holder in the headlamp with the bulb.
› Fit protective cap B » Fig. 184 on page 155 Insert.

156 Do-it-yourself
Replacing light bulbs for fog lights Insert the headlight and grille
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 4
» Fig. 189 and tightening.
› Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place.
Changing the bulb for the licence plate light

Fig. 190 Removing the licence plate light / replacing the bulb

 Read and observe and on page 154 first.

› Push the light in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 190 until it is released.
Fig. 189 Removing / replacing the fog light bulb › Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it.
› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 .
 Read and observe and on page 154 first. › Insert a new bulb into the holder.
Removing the protective grille and headlight
› Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 .
› Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
› Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A » Fig. 189.
› Pull on the hook in the direction of arrow 1 to remove the protective grille Note
in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 189. On vehicles with license plate light, a specialist should be consulted in the
› Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit. event of an LED failure.
› With the key 2 » page 139, Vehicle tool kit, unlock the locking C in direction
of arrow 3 .
› Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 4 .
Replacing the light bulb
› Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 189.
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 6 .
› Turn the socket with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow 7 .
› Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 8 .
› Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of
arrow 7 as far as the stop.
› Attach the connector.
Fuses and light bulbs 157
Removing/inserting the taillight › Close the boot lid.
CAUTION
■ When installing the light, ensure that the cable bundle does not become
pinched between the body and the lamp – risk of damage to the electrical in-
stallation and risk of water ingress.
■ If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we recom-
mend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
■ Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.

Replacing the bulbs in the taillight assembly

Fig. 191 Remove light / pull out connector


Fig. 192 Outer part of the lamp/inner part of the lamp
 Read and observe and on page 154 first.
 Read and observe and on page 154 first.
Removing
› Open the boot lid. Outer part of the lamp
› Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A » Fig. 191. › Turn the holder with the bulb A » Fig. 192 in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 . › Remove the holders with the bulbs from the light housing in the direction of
› Unscrew the screws B with the key from the tool kit. the arrow 2 .
› Grasp the lamp and carefully remove in the direction of arrow 2 . › Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the light housing and turn in the oppo-
› Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 3 . site direction of the arrow 1 to the stop.
› Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction Inner parts of the lamp
of the arrow 4 .
› Unlock the bulb holder using the marked area with arrows » Fig. 192 and re-
Fitting move the bulb holder from the light.
› Insert the connector into the light and lock it securely. › Turn the respective light bulb counter-clockwise to the stop and remove it
› Insert the lamp with the pin B » Fig. 192 on page 158 into the recesses C from the bulb holder.
» Fig. 191 in the body. › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
› Carefully push the cover in » . stop.
› Screw the lamp into place and install the cover. The cover must engage se- › Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly. 
curely.

158 Do-it-yourself
The lamp holder must engage firmly.

Fuses and light bulbs 159


Technical data Vehicle data

Technical data
Basic vehicle data

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle data 160
Operating weight 161
Payload 161 Fig. 193 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives 161 Vehicle data sticker
Dimensions 163 The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 193 -  is located on the base of the luggage
Departure angle 164 compartment and is also stuck into the Owner's Manual.

The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece- The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. 1 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 Vehicle type
The performance values listed were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system. 3 Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in 4 Partial vehicle description
conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the oper-
5 Approved tyre diameter in inches1)
ating and technical data of vehicles.
The approved tyres and rim sizes for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle's
The listed values are for the basic model without optional equipment.
technical documentation (the so called COC document) and this also states the
declaration of conformity.
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 193 -  is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
right-hand driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
6 Vehicle manufacturers
7 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
8 Maximum permissible gross weight
9 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer) 

1) Only valid for some countries.

160 Technical data


10 Maximum permissible front axle load Operating weight
11 Maximum permissible rear axle load Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
Vehicle identification number (VIN) MG 1165
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into 1.2 ltr./66 kW TSI
DSG 1199
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
1.2 l/81 kW TSI MG 1185
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate. DSG 1217
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
The VIN number can also be displayed in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual - In- DSG (Green tec) 1226
fotainment. 1.6 l./66 kW MPI MG 1150
MG 1165
Engine number 1.6 l./81 kW MPI
The engine number (three-digit identifier and serial number) is stamped on the AG 1205
engine block. MG 1234
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia) DSG 1255
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the 1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1280
registration documents, field 17.
Note
Maximum permissible trailer weight
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
garage.
1000 m above sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing Payload
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maximum
permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%. It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi-
cle and the loaded trailer. The payload consists of the following weights.
▶ The weight of the passengers.
WARNING ▶ The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci- ▶ The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
dent and damage! ▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
▶ Trailer draw-bar load when towing a trailer (max. 50 kg).

Operating weight Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to


This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operat- ECE Regulations and EU Directives
ing weight without any equipment added that would also increase the weight
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the
(e.g. air conditioning, emergency or spare wheel etc.). It also includes a weight
time of going to press.
allowance for the driver (75 kg), the weight of the operating fluids, the tool kit
and a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity. The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation. 

Technical data 161


The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.

Note
■ The emission and fuel consumption figures given on the ŠKODA websites or
in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established
in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by statutory or
technical rules for the determination of operational and technical data of mo-
tor vehicles.
■ Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from
the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commer-
cial and technical vehicle documentation.

162 Technical data


Dimensions

Fig. 194 Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)


» Fig. 194 Specification Value
A Height 1461
Basic dimensions 1457
B Front track
Vehicles with the 1.2 l/66 kW TSI, 1.6 l/66 kW MPI and 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine 1463
C Width 1706
Basic dimensions 1494
D Rear track
Vehicles with the 1.2 l/66 kW TSI, 1.6 l/66 kW MPI and 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine 1500
E Width including exterior mirror 1940
F Clearance 136
G Wheel base 2602
H Length 4483

Technical data 163


Departure angle

Fig. 195
Overhang angle

Angle » Fig. 195


A Overhang angle, front
B Overhang angle, rear
The overhang angle values indicate the maximum incline of a slope, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without the bumper or underbody mak-
ing contact with the slope. The values listed correspond to the maximum axle
load, front or back.
Overhang angle (°)
Overhang angle, front Overhang angle, rear
14 12.3

164 Technical data


Vehicle-specific details per engine type

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 1.6 l/66 kW MPI engine 166
1.2 ltr. / 66 kW TSI engine 165 1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine 166
1.2 ltr. / 81 kW TSI engine 165 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine 166
1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI engine 166 1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine 167

The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the operat-
ing and technical data of vehicles.
The emissions standard is detailed in the technical vehicle documentation as well as in the certificate of conformity (COC document), which can be obtained from
a ŠKODA partnera).
a) Only valid for some countries and some models.

1.2 ltr. / 66 kW TSI engine


Output (kW/rpm) 66/4400
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160 / 1400-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1197
Transmission MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 186 186
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.3 11.4

1.2 ltr. / 81 kW TSI engine


Output (kW/rpm) 81/4600
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175 / 1400-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1197
Transmission MG
Top speed (km/h) 200
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.8

Technical data 165


1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI engine
Output (kW/rpm) 92/5000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200 / 1400-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1395
Transmission DSG
Top speed (km/h) 208
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.0

1.6 l/66 kW MPI engine


Output (kW/rpm) 66/4250
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1598
Transmission MG
Top speed (km/h) 185
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.4

1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine


Output (kW/rpm) 81/5800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1598
Transmission MG AG
Top speed (km/h) 195 191
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.3 11.6

1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine


Output (kW/rpm) 66/3500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 230 / 1750-2500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/1422
Transmission MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 185 185
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.7 11.8

166 Technical data


1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW/rpm) 85/3500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250 / 1500-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1596
Transmission MG
Top speed (km/h) 201
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.0

Technical data 167


Armrest Bonnet
Index Front 63 Closing 126
Rear 64 Opening 126
A
Ashtray 69 Boot
ABS Assembling the Cargo element 78
Operation 94 bar ball, Step 1 110 Class N1 vehicles 78
Warning light 32 bar ball, Step 2 110 Hooks 76
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 117 Assist systems 93 Storage compartments 77
Accessories 115 Auto Check Control 38 Boot cover
Adjusting Automatic drive Parking position 77
Steering wheel 11 Selector lever 89 Boot lid
Adjusting the seats 10 Automatic driving light control 55 Automatic locking 51
Adjustment Open/Close 51
Automatic gearbox 89
Beam range 54 Kickdown 91 Brake Assist (HBA) 95
Advance warning / emergency braking 37 Malfunction 34 Brake booster 86
Advice on tyre/wheel usage 133 Selector lever emergency unlocking 149 Brake fluid 130
Air-conditioning system Selector lever lock 90 Check 130
Air outlet vents 82 Starting-off and driving 91 specification 130
Airbag 15 Warning light 34 Brake pads
Adjustments and impairments to the airbag Automatic shutdown of consumers 131 new 86
system 116 Automatic transmission Brake pedal (automatic transmission)
Deactivating 18 Selector lever lock 90 Warning light 34
deactivation 18 Tiptronic 90 Brakes
Deployment 16 AUX 67 Brake booster 86
Warning light 32 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 92 Brake fluid 130
Airbag system 15 Braking and stabilisation systems 93
Air conditioning 79 B Handbrake 87
Air distribution control 81 Information on braking 86
Ball bar Warning lights 30
Climatronic 80 Standy position 109
Manual air conditioning 80 Brake system 93
Ball head
Air distribution control 81 Braking
Check fitting 111
Air outlet vents 82 Running in 91
Ready position 109
Alarm 49 Breakdown kit 143
Battery
Trailer 114 Change in key 148 Breakdown service
All-year tyres 136 See Help in an emergency 8
Belts 12
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 94 Buttons in the door
Belt tensioners 14
Anti-theft alarm system 49 Electric windows 52
Bluetooth
Trailer 114 See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
Anti-theft wheel bolts 141

168 Index
C Check Temperature display 29
Brake fluid 130 Warning light 35
Camera Engine oil 129 CORNER
See reversing camera 98 Fit ball head properly 111 See Fog lights with the CORNER function 56
CAR Oil level 129 Correct routing of seat belt
See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 Checking 13
Car battery Battery status 132 Correct seated position 10
Check condition 132 Coolant 130 Correct seating position 12
Cover 132 Checks Cruise Control System 100
Disconnecting and reconnecting 133 Statutory checks 115
Replacing 133 Cup holders 68
Children and safety 19
Warning light 35 Child safety lock 49
Winter operation 132
D
Child seat 19
CAR button DAY LIGHT
Classification 21
See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 See Daytime running lights 54
Installation location 21, 23
Car care in the passenger seat 21 Daytime running lights 54
Exterior 120 ISOFIX 22, 23 De-icing the windscreen and rear window 59
Interior 122 on the front passenger seat 20 Deactivating an airbag 18
Outside 121 on the passenger seat 21 Deactivation
Car computer TOP TETHER 24 Airbag 18
see multifunction display 39 Cigarette lighter 69 Delayed locking of the boot lid
Care and maintenance 115 Cleaning the vehicle See boot lid 51
Cargo element 78 Outside 121 Departure angle 164
Carrier 78 Windows 121 Diesel 125
Car washing 119 Climatronic 79 Diesel fuel 125
Exterior 120 air distribution control 81 Diesel particle filter (DPF) 36
Interior 122 Automatic operation 81 Digital Clock 38
washing 119 Operating elements 80 Digital Service Plan 118
Central locking 45 Clothes hook 72 Dipstick 129
Problems 49 Cockpit 27 Display
Central locking button 47 Lighting 57 Compass points 37
Change Comfort signalling 55 Coolant temperature 29
Battery 148 COMING HOME 56 Fuel level 29
Changing Compartments 66 Gear changes 38
Wheels 139 Component protection 116 in the instrument cluster 37
Changing a wheel 139 Computer MAXI DOT 41
Changing gear see multifunction display 39 Service intervals 42
Selector lever 89 Coolant 129 Disposal
Charging a vehicle battery 132 Checking 130 Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 117
Refilling 130

Index 169
Distance warning 104 Emergency equipment Films 120
Warning light 37 Fire extinguisher 138 Fire extinguisher 138
Door First aid kit 138 First aid kit 138
Child safety lock 49 Jack 139 Flashing 55
Emergency locking 149 Reflective vest 138
Floor covering in the luggage compartment 78
Emergency locking of the driver's door 148 Vehicle tool kit 139
Fog lights
Opening/Closing 48 Warning triangle 138
Warning light 34
Door alarm 37 Emergency spare
Fog lights/rear fog light 56
Drive Removing / stowing 140
Fog lights with the CORNER function 56
Driving through water 92 Emission control system 32
Footmats 88
DriveGreen 91 Emissions 161
see footmats 88
Driving Engine
Force limiter
Emissions 161 Information messages 35
Window 53
Fuel consumption 161 Running in 91
Front Assist 102
Maximum speed 165 Engine compartment 125
Deactivation/activation 105
through water 92 Brake fluid 130
Distance warning 104
Coolant 129
E Malfunctions 105
Engine oil 128
Operation 103
Economical driving 91 Overview 127
Radar sensor 103
Vehicle battery 131
EDL 95 Warning and automatic braking 104
Windscreen washer fluid 127
Electric power windows Warning light 37
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 94
Operational faults 53 Front seats 62
Engine number 160
Electric windows 51 Fuel 123
Buttons in the driver´s door 52 engine oil
Diesel 125
specification 128
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 95 Fuel gauge 29
Engine oil 128 refer to Fuel 123
Electronic immobiliser 83
Check 129 Refuelling 124
Emergency Oil changing 128
Changing a wheel 139 Unleaded petrol 124
Refilling 129 Warning light 33
Hazard warning light system 57 Warning light 35
Jump-starting 145 Fuel consumption 161
EPC 32
Selector lever-unlocking 149 Fuel reserve 33
Starting / stopping the engine with the push of ESC
Fuses 151
a button 84 Operation 94
in the dashboard 151, 152
Starting the engine / stopping with the push of Warning light 31
in the engine compartment 153, 154
a button 85 Extended warranty 5
Towing the vehicle 146 G
Towing the vehicle using the trailer device 147 F
Gearbox
Tyre repair 143 Fastening elements 75 Information messages 34
Unlocking/locking the door 148 Fatigue detection 105
Unlocking / locking the door 149

170 Index
Gear change Information system 37 Lever
Gear recommendation 38 Auto Check Control 37 Cruise control 101
Information on the selected gear 38 Door alarm 37 Front Assist 105
Gear changing Gear recommendation 38 Operation of the information system 39
Gear stick 88 MAXI DOT display 41 Speed regulating system 102
Genuine parts 116 Multifunction display 39 Turn signal/main beam 55
Glasses compartment 71 Service interval display 42 Windscreen wipers 60
GPS Infotainment 6 Light
See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 Instrument cluster 28 Cockpit 57
See instrument cluster 28 COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 56
H Warning lights 29 Daytime running lights 54
Interior light 58 Flash 55
Handbrake 87 Parking light 57
Warning light 30 Interior lighting 58
Replacing bulbs 154
Hazard warning light system 57 Interior monitor 50
Turn signal/main beam 55
HBA 95 ISOFIX 22, 23
Light bulbs
Headrests 64 Replacing 154
J
Heating 79, 80 Lighting
Air distribution control 81 Jack 139 Interior lighting 57
Exterior mirrors 62 Jacking points Luggage compartment 74
Seats 65 Raise vehicle 142 Lights 53
Windscreen and rear window 59 Jump-starting 145 Automatic driving light control 55
Help in an emergency 8 Beam range adjustment 54
HHC 95 K Driving abroad 57
Hill Start Assist (HHC) 95 KESSY Fog lights/rear fog light 56
Hitch 108 Unlocking/locking 47 Fog lights with the CORNER function 56
Hooks 76 Key Hazard warning light system 57
Change battery 148 Headlight cleaning system 61
Horn 27
Lock 46 Low beam 54
Starting / stopping the engine 84 Parking light 54
I
Switch on/off ignition 84 Switching on/off 54
I-PAD holder 73 Warning lights 29
Unlock 46
Ignition lock 84 Load 161
Images L Lock
See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 Individual settings 48
Lamp failure
Immobiliser 83 Key 46
Warning light 36
Inertia reels 14 Locking
Lamps
Information about the towing process 146 Central locking button 47
Warning light 36
in case of emergency 149
LEAVING HOME 56
KESSY 47
Remote control 46

Index 171
Lock steering lock 83 Media Overview
Low beam 54 AUX 67 Cockpit 27
Low tyre pressure warning See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 Engine compartment 127
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 106 USB 67 Fuses 151
Luggage compartment 74 Memory 40 Warning lights 29
Cover 76 Mirror 61
Fastening elements 75 Vanity 59 P
Fixing nets 75 Mobility warranty 5 Parking 88
Floor covering on both sides 78 Modes of the automatic transmission 89 Parking aid 96
Lighting 74 Modifications and technical alterations 115 Reversing camera 98
See boot lid 51 MSR 94 Parking aid 96
unlock manually 149 Automatic system activation when moving for-
Multi collision brake (MCB) 95
Unlock the boot lid 149 ward 98
Multifunction display
Luggage compartment cover 76 Function 96
Functions 39
Luggage compartment lid 50 Information 40 Parking assistance
Memory 40 Activation / deactivation 97
M Display in the Infotainment display 97
Multifunction pocket 76
Main beam 55 Multifunction steering wheel 39 Parking light 54
Warning light 34 Multimedia holder 70 Parking the vehicle
Manual air conditioning see Parking 88
Air distribution control 81 N Park Pilot 96
Controls 80 Parts replacement 115
N1 78
Manual gear changing Passive safety
Nameplate 160
see gear changing 88 Before setting off 10
Navigation Driving safety 10
Materials defect liability 4
S Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
MAXI DOT Passive Safety 10
Nets 75
See MAXI DOT display 41 Pedals 88
MAXI DOT display Footmats 88
O
Main menu 41 Petrol 124
Menu item assist systems 42 oil Pocketin the luggage compartment 76
Menu item Audio 41 see Engine oil 129 Pockets 72
Menu item navigation 41 Oil Power steering 31
Menu item telephone 42 Information messages 35
Practical features
Operation 39 Oil changing Pockets 72
Maximum speed 165 Engine oil 128 Storage compartment for umbrella 72
MCB 95 On-board computer Waste container 68
Mechanical windows 51 see multifunction display 39 Preheating unit 32
Open/close 52 Operating weight 161
Original accessories 116

172 Index
R Roof Rear seat backrests 63
Load 78 Setting 62
Radio Roof rack 78 Seats and head restraint 62
See Owner´s Manual - Infotainment 6 Running in Selector lever 89
Raise vehicle 142 Brake pads 86 Selector lever control 89
Rear fog light 56 Engine 91 Selector lever lock
Warning light 32 Tyres 133 Warning light 34
Rear seats 63 Service 115
Rear view camera S Service interval display 42
Function keys 99 SafeLock 48 Warning light 37
Orientation lines 99 Service intervals 117
Safety 10
Rear View Camera Airbag 15 Service plan 118
Operation 99 Child safety 19 Setting
Rear view mirror 61 Child safety seats 19 Headrests 64
Rear window - heating 59 Correct seated position 10 Mirror 61, 62
Refilling Headrests 64 Seat belt height 13
Coolant 130 ISOFIX 22, 23 Seats 62
Engine oil 129 TOP TETHER 24 Setting the
Windscreen washer fluid 127 SAFE, SAFELOCK Clock 38
Reflective vest 138 See SafeLock 48 Shifting
Refuelling 124 Saving electrical energy 91 Tiptronic 90
Fuel 124 Saving fuel 91 SmartGate
Remote SD card Connection via Wi-Fi 43
Change battery 148 See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 introductory information 43
Synchronisation process 49 Seat belt Password/PIN code change 44
Remote control height adjustment 13 Setting 44
Unlocking/locking the vehicle 46 Warning light 34 Wi-Fi direct 44
Removing the Seat belts 12 SmartLink
bar ball, Step 1 111 Belt tensioners 14 See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
bar ball, Step 2 111 fastening and unfastening 14 Snow chains 137
Repairs and technical alterations 115 Inertia reels 14 sockets
Replacing Warning light 30 12-volt socket in the luggage compartment 70
Bulbs 154 Seats Sockets
Fuses 151 Adjusting the front seats 62 12-volt socket in the interior 70
Windscreen wiper blades 150 Front 62 Sound
Rev counter 28 Front armrest 63 See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
Reversing camera 98 Headrests 64 Spare wheel 135
Rims 133 Heating 65 Removing / stowing 140
Rear 63
Rear armrest 64

Index 173
Speed limiter 101 Storage compartment Towing a trailer 114
Warning light 34 for umbrella 72 Towing away 146
Speed regulating system Glasses compartment 71 Towing device 112
Warning light 34 in the boot 77 Accessories 112
Speed symbol 136 in the centre console 67 Description 108
Spoiler 116 in the front arm rest 71 Vertical load 108
on the dashboard 67 Towing eye 147
Stabilisation system 93
on the front passenger side 71
Stability Control (ESC) 94 Towing protection 50
Storage compartments 66
START-STOP 85 Towing the vehicle 146
Stowage
Jump-starting 145 Traction control (TCS) 31, 94
compartments in the doors 67
Manually deactivating/activating the system 86 Trailer
operation 85 Sun visors 59
Connect and disconnect 112
Warning light 36 Switch Load 113
START-STOP system 85 Car battery 133 Loading 113
Start engine Switch light on/off 54 Towing a trailer 114
Immobiliser 83 Switch off Trailer stabilization system (TSA) 95
Starter button Alarm 50 Trailer towing 108
Lock / unlock the steering lock 83 Switch off ignition 84 Transport
Problems with the engine start 85 Key 84 Luggage compartment 74
Starting / stopping the engine 84 Switch off TCS Roof rack 78
Switch on/off ignition 84 Warning light 32 Towing device and trailer 108
Starting engine Switch on ignition 84 Transporting children 19
Jump-starting 145 Key 84 Triangle 138
Starting the engine TSA 95
Jump-starting 145 T
Turn signal 55
Key 84 Tablet holder 73 Turn signal system
Starter button 84 TCS Warning light 33, 34
Steering lock (KESSY system) Deactivate/activate 94 Tyre load capacity 136
Warning light 31 Function 94 Tyre pressure 134
Steering wheel Warning light 31, 32 Warning light 33
Buttons 39 Technical data 160 Tyre pressure monitoring 106
Correct posture 11 Telephone Warning light 33
setting 11 See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6 Tyre repair 143
Stopping Ticket holder 66
see Parking 88 Tyres 133
Time 38 damage 133
Stopping the engine Tiptronic 90 Explanation of the label 136
Key 84
Tools 139 new 133
Starter button 84
TOP TETHER 24 Tyre pressure 134
Storage 66
Towing 147 Wear indicator 135

174 Index
Tyre size 136 Vehicle data sticker 160 Tyre damage 133
Vehicle data sticker and nameplate Tyre pressure 134
U Vehicle data sticker and nameplate 160 Tyre storage 133
Unlock Vehicle dimensions 163 Unidirectional tyres 134
Individual settings 48 Vehicle height 163 Winter tyres 136
Key 46 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 160 Wi-Fi 43
Unlocking See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
Vehicle length 163
Central locking button 47 Wi-Fi direct 44
Vehicle tool kit 139
In case of emergency 148 Window
Vehicle width 163
KESSY 47 Operate 51
Vest 138
Remote control 46 Windscreen - heating 59
VIN
Unlocking and locking 45 Windscreen washer fluid
Vehicle Identification Number 160
Unlock steering lock 83 Refilling 127
Visibility 58
USB 67 Warning light 36
Visors 59
Used vehicles Windscreen washer system 59
Voice control
Acceptance and recycling 117 Windscreen wipers and washers 59
See Owner´s Manual -Infotainment 6
Useful equipment Activation 60
Clothes hook 72 Add fluid 127
W
Cup holders 68 Automatic rear window wiper 60
Glasses compartment 71 Warning lights 29 Operation 60
Multimedia holder 70 Warning of a low temperature 36 Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 150
Useful features Warning symbols Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 150
12-volt socket in the interior 70 see Warning lights 29 Service position of the windscreen wiper arms 150
12-volt socket in the luggage compartment 70 Warning triangle 138 Winter operation 136
Ashtray 69 warning when speeding 40 All-year tyres 136
Cigarette lighter 69 Warranty 4 Car battery 132
Pockets 72 Diesel fuel 125
Waste container 68
Reflective vest 138 Snow chains 137
Weather conditions 115 Winter tyres 136
Storage compartment 66
Weights 160, 161 Winter tyres 136
Ticket holder 66
Wheel bolts Wipers and washer
V Anti-theft wheel bolts 141 Warning light for windscreen washer fluid level 36
Caps 141
Vehicle battery Wiping interval 60
Loosening and tightening 142
Automatic shutdown of consumers 131 Wheels 133
charging 132 Changing 139
Safety instructions 131 Full trim 141
Vehicle care 119 Load Index 136
Vehicle cleaning 119 Snow chains 137
Vehicle Condition Speed symbol 136
See Auto Check Control 38 Tyre age 133

Index 175
176 Index
Index 177
178 Index
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2016
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
www.skoda-auto.com

Návod k obsluze
Rapid anglicky 11.2016
S56.5610.14.20
5JA012720AK


5JA012720AK

You might also like